Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 261

Lifeguard

Service Manual
2009
Table of Contents
Section Category Topic Reference #

Introduction
Lifeguard Service Manual
Purpose I-1.1
Organization I-1.2
Associated Resources I-1.3

Lifeguard Service
Mission I-2.1
Organizational Structure I-2.2
Chain of Command I-2.3
Contact Numbers I-2.4
Facility Directions &
Descriptions I-2.5

District
Overview I-3.1
Organizational Structure I-3.2

Administration
Compensation
Time Cards A-1.2
Instructor Reimbursement A-1.3
Holiday Pay A-1.4
Mileage Reimbursement A-1.5
Shift Differential A-1.6
Pay Steps A-1.7
Secondary Assignments A-1.8
Overtime A-1.9

Personnel
Vacation/sick leave A-2.1
Check In/Orientation A-2.2
Minors A-2.3
Certificate Requirements A-2.4
Availability A-2.5
550 Swim and retakes A-2.6

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4-1-98


Last Revised: 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 5
Table of Contents
Section Category Topic Reference #
Performance
Discipline A-3.1
Labor Agreement A-3.2
Commendations A-3.3
Code of Conduct A-3.4
Reasonable Suspicion A-3.5
E-communications A-3.6

Uniforms
Requirements A-4.1
Procedure A-4.2
Womens swim suits A-4.3
Recognition Alterations A-4.4

Employee Accidents
Injury A-5.1
Property A-5.2

Personal Equipment
Authorization to Use A-6.1
Reimbursement A-6.2
Cell Phone Use A-6.3

Sensitivity Awareness
Harassment A-7.1
Disability Etiquette A-7.2
Beach Wheelchairs A-7.3
Public Relations A-7.4
JG Interactions A-7.5

Property
Lost and Found A-8.1
Park Ops Field Report A-8.2
Security: Keys & Alarms A-8.3

Operations
Scheduling
General Guidelines O-1.1
Facility Schedules O-1.2
Person in Charge (PIC) O-1.3
Requesting time off/
East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4-1-98
Last Revised: 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 5
Table of Contents
Section Category Topic Reference #
Changes O-1.4
Change of Assignment O-1.5
Inclement Weather O-1.6
Extension & Reduction of
Lifeguard Service Hours O-1.7
Special Events O-1.8

Record Keeping
Forms and Reports O-2.1
Facility Diagram O-2.2
Statistical Definitions O-2.3

Maintenance
Agreements O-3.1
Lifeguard Stations O-3.2
Station Postings O-3.3

Equipment
Requests O-4.1
Checks O-4.2
Inventory Process O-4.3
AED Administration O-4.4

In Service Training
Lifeguard Academy O-5.1
Morning Training O-5.2
Certification Challenges O-5.3
Meetings O-5.4
New Lg. Supplemental
Training O-5.5
New Lg. On-site Training O-5.6

Communications
Radio Use O-6.1
Telephone Use O-6.2
Voice Gun O-6.3
Public Feedback O-6.4
Media Relations O-6.5
Swim Groups O-6.6
Group Notification Process O-6.7
Group Facility Rental O-6.8

Opening and Closing

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4-1-98


Last Revised: 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 5
Table of Contents
Section Category Topic Reference #
Season O-7.1
Daily Opening and
Closing Procedures O-7.2
Lifeguard Chairs and
First Aid Station Set Up O-7.3
Daily Briefing O-7.4
Quarry and Anza Access O-7.5
Morning Roll Call O-7.6

Special Events
Procedures O-8.1
Briefing Outline O-8.2

Safety
Station Duties
Chair S-1.1
Backer S-1.2
First Aid S-1.3
Alternate S-1.4
Break S-1.5
Rotation S-1.6

Water Surveillance
Zones S-2.1
Scanning S-2.2
Deployment S-2.3
Rescue Drills S-2.4
Recognition Drill S-2.5

Preventive Actions
Swim Test S-3.1
Visitor Rules and
Regulations S-3.2
Swim Breaks S-3.3
Dog Prohibitions S-3.4
Child Supervision S-3.5
A Frame Pub. Ed. Signs S-3.6

Employee Safety
General LG safety S-4.1

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4-1-98


Last Revised: 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 5
Table of Contents
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies
Emergency Response Plans
Universal E-1.1
Chlorine Release E-1.2
Crowd Management E-1.3
Post Emergency
Management E-1.4
Lightning E-1.5
AFR/Vomit E-1.6
Recreational Water Illness E-1.7
Biohazard Clean up E-1.8
Fire E-1.9

Missing Person E-2.1


Found Child E-2.2
Missing Person
Open Water Swim E-2.3
Search Termination E-2.4
Missing Lifeguard E-2.5
Underwater plant life E-2,6

Rescues E-3.1
Victim Evaluation E-3.2

Medical Inside Facility E-4.1


Medical Outside Facility E-4.2
AED Use E-4.3

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4-1-98


Last Revised: 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 5 of 5
Introduction
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Service Manual Purpose I-1.1

PURPOSE
This manual is intended to be a statement of Park
District and Lifeguard Service operational philosophy,
policies, procedures, guidelines and objectives. By meeting
its purpose, this manual will help preserve the efficient,
effective operation of the Districts preventive
Lifeguard Service regardless of changes in personnel. It
will also aid in the coordinated efforts of all District
employees as we endeavor to fulfill our public safety
mission. It will be updated regularly to reflect improved
methods. To this end, we encourage suggestions on
ways to improve the manual and the policies or
procedures it contains.

This manual does not attempt to provide procedures for the myriad of
incidents that lifeguards can expect to encounter on the job. There are many texts,
training manuals and protocols that go into building a body of knowledge and
technique in the area of lifeguarding and emergency services management. Also,
while there is extensive resource material to draw from, there is no substitute for a
quality employee who relies on his/her training, experience and judgement to make
prudent, responsible decisions in the field.

This manual is intended to be the primary reference tool for District


lifeguards to access information necessary for them to consistently carry out
established District policies, procedures and guidelines. It represents just one
resource in a complex collection of the Districts overall operating procedures. It
contains a collection of information found originally in other manuals that is
compiled here for ease of reference, as well as policies specific to lifeguards.

Swimming continues to be one of the most popular recreational activities in


America today. Unfortunately, enjoying this activity doesnt come without some
risk. People are born without the knowledge and skill necessary to behave safely in
or near the water. In response to swimming related accidents, the field of
lifeguarding developed. Today, through the hard work and dedication of many
individuals it has evolved into a respected professional field. It is widely recognized
that on duty lifeguards greatly enhance swimming safety.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Lifeguard Service Manual Revised 12/9/08
Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Service Manual Purpose I-1.1

The East Bay Regional Park Districts Lifeguard Service has a long
tradition of providing top quality public service by enhancing swimming safety.
Beginning in the early 1940's, at Lake Temescal and Lake Anza, and continuing
through to today, lifeguards have been protecting the Districts swimming public.
Currently, District lifeguards keep a vigilant watch over hundreds of thousands of
beach visitors each season. While watching over these visitors, one of the
lifeguards most common tasks is recognizing potential water related accidents as
they develop and intervening before they occur. In this regard, District lifeguards
perform thousands of preventive actions each year in service to the public. The
lifeguard service also provides a wide range of other services including: boat and
swimmer rescues, first aid, underwater recovery, lost person assistance, public
information, beach safety presentations, learn to swim and Junior Lifeguard
programs.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Lifeguard Service Manual Revised 12/9/08
Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Service Manual Organization I-1.2

Organization of the Lifeguard Service Manual


This manual is designed to convey expected performance
standards and guidelines to lifeguards in an easy to reference format.

It is divided into five sections:


Introduction
Administration
Operations
Safety
Emergencies

Each section is divided into categories that group general themes. Each category is then
divided into more specific topic subheadings. Each topic has an associated reference number to help
the reader locate specific information. Reference numbers follow a numerical sequence throughout
the manual but are used in lieu of page numbers so that revisions have no impact on the remaining
reference numbers.

Each topic is written to apply to all lifeguards. Often, there is a


Person In Charge section within a topic that provides information specific to a
lifeguard with supervisory responsibility.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date:4/1/98


Last revised 12/9/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Service Manual Resources I-1.3

Associated Resources

There are many source documents that relate to lifeguard duties and policies in this
manual.

Applicable information was drawn from these documents and compiled in the
Lifeguard Service Manual.

East Bay Regional Park District:


Ordinance 38
Park Operations Guidelines
Personnel Administrative Manual
Safety Manual
Signing Manual
Park Operating Hours
Chart of Accounts
Emergency Operations Manual
Labor agreement with Local 2428
Swimming Policy

Other resources:

Alameda County EMS BLS Potocols and Policy

USLA Manual of Open Water Lifesaving

Dive Rescue Specialist Training Manual

American Red Cross:


CPR for the Professional Rescuer textbook
Emergency Response textbook
Lifeguard textbook
Water Safety Instructor textbook

East Bay Regional Park District Effective 4/1/98


Last revised 3/11/05
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Service Manual Mission I-2.1

Mission Statement
Lifeguard Services will strive to deliver the highest quality
lifeguarding and program instruction for the safety of park
visitors engaged in aquatic activities at our swim facilities.

Lifeguard Services is committed to accomplish its mission by:

demonstrating that Lifeguards strengthen the Public Trust placed in us through


constant vigilance and professional, courteous, competent treatment of visitors;

maintaining as a top priority, dedication to the safety of the diverse public we are
assigned to protect, avoiding any distractions which may interfere with this priority;

taking appropriate preventive steps to minimize the risk of accidents at swim


facilities, in the water, and on the beaches by using appropriate advisement and
enforcement techniques;

providing water rescue services to those in danger, implementing search and


recovery protocols when necessary;

administering medical care as the First Responders in the Emergency Medical


Service survival chain to those injured and ill;

maintaining the highest standards of fitness and training in recognition of the


physical demands placed on Lifeguards;

staying on the forefront in equipment, training, certification, policies, and


procedures;

taking pride in the profession and advancing water safety education whenever
possible;

promoting team work in association with other diverse District staff, including park
operations, police and firefighters, in response to critical incidents, and routine
public service demands and extending this team work to local first responder
jurisdictions when necessary.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/9/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference#
Introduction Service Manual Organization I-2.2

Organizational Structure of East Bay Regional Park District

The park district is organized so that its mission is carried out efficiently and
effectively. Employees are encouraged to conduct business, and handle problems, at the
lowest possible level in the organizational structure. The agencys style of operation allows
open access to all employees, if willing and available, for getting information, asking
questions, and getting advice; with each person working within their level and area of
responsibility. However, going through the chain of command is absolutely necessary, in
order to maintain accountability up and down the chain of command, as important District
business is conducted.

The chain of command for Lifeguard Services extends from the publicly elected
Board of Directors, to the General Manager, to the Assistant General Manager of Public
Safety, through the Fire Chief, to the Aquatic Manager, then to the Aquatic Supervisor.
For more information, see Reference #I-3.2 -- Organizational Structure.

Lifeguards come under the direct supervision of the seasonal Lifeguard III, who
reports directly to their regions Aquatic Supervisor (The Districts lifeguarded facilities
are grouped into either the North or South regions, with an Aquatic Supervisor assigned to
each region). Each region also has an Aquatic Assistant who assists in fulfilling the
Aquatic Supervisor responsibilities. Each lifeguard works for a single supervisor, the
Lifeguard III at the facility where they are working. The official day to day work
communication should come from, or through, the Lifeguard III for clarifying expectations,
appraising performance, investigating complaints, grievances, setting work priorities, etc.
The Lifeguard III, or designee, is responsible for providing the leadership and direction
necessary for day to day work assignments and projects. Exceptions should be made only
when urgent situations arise and a Lifeguard III is unavailable.

If the Lifeguard III is absent, the Lifeguard II takes over the Lifeguard IIIs
authority and responsibilities. If both the Lifeguard III and Lifeguard II are absent, a
Lifeguard I will be designated Person in Charge (PIC) and act for the Lifeguard II

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Service Manual Organization I-2.2

The two Aquatic Supervisors are scheduled so that one (or their designee) is
available every day during the lifeguard service season. The Aquatic Supervisor designee,
on their regular day off, is the Aquatic Assistant for that region. For example, if the North
Region Aquatic Supervisor is on a scheduled day off, contact the North Region Aquatic
Assistant. If there is difficulty reaching the correct regional Aquatic Supervisor or Aquatic
Assistant, the other regions Aquatic Supervisor should be contacted.

On occasion, some issues will require the attention of an Aquatic Supervisor. It is


up to the Aquatic Assistant to recognize when these issues arise.

For matters that require lifeguards to contact a member of a specific parks staff, the
Person in Charge should contact the Park Supervisor (or their designee) first.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4-1-98


Last revised 2/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Lifeguard Service Chain of Command I-2.3

Lifeguard Chain of Command

Dan McCormick
Aquatics Manager

Pete DeQuincy Nick Schriver


Aquatic Supervisor Aquatic Supervisor
North Region South Region

Aaron Roth Program Assistant Eric Nurse


Aquatic Assistant Aquatics Aquatic Assistant
North Region South Region

Del Valle East


Lifeguard III
Tilden
Lifeguard II/1
Lifeguard III
Lifeguard II/1
Del Valle West
Lifeguard III
Contra Loma Lifeguard II/1
Lifeguard III
Lifeguard II/1 Shadow Cliffs
Lifeguard III
Lifeguard II/1
Lake Temescal
Lifeguard III
Don Castro
Lifeguard II/1
Lifeguard III
Lifeguard II/1

Roberts
Lifeguard III Quarry Lakes
Lifeguard II/1 Lifeguard III
Lifeguard II/1

Diablo Foothills
Lifeguard III Cull Canyon
Lifeguard 1 Lifeguard III
Lifeguard II/1

East Bay Regional Park District


Effective Date: 4/1/98
Last revised 2/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Lifeguard Service Contact Numbers I-2.4

NORTH FACILITIES LIFEGUARD STATIONS PARK OFFICE


Tilden (Lake Anza) (510) 848-3028 (510) 843-2137
Contra Loma (925) 754-6844 (925) 757-2632
(925) 757-9606 (Main Gate)
Diablo Foothills (Castle Rock) (925) 945-8206 (925) 945-8244
Roberts (510) 544-3157 (510) 544-3155
(510) 544-3156 (Kiosk)
Temescal (510) 652-2021 (510) 652-1155

SOUTH FACILITIES LIFEGUARD STATIONS PARK OFFICE


Cull Canyon (510) 581-1792 (510) 537-2240

Del Valle (925) 443-3504 (West) (925) 373-9398


(925) 373-6315 (East) (925) 373-0332 (Main Gate)
Don Castro (510) 733-0483 (510) 538-1148
Quarry Lakes (510) 795-4132 (510) 795-4889
(510) 795-4883 (Main Gate)
Shadow Cliffs (925) 484-1986 (925) 544-3235
(925) 544-3230 (Main Gate)

AQUATIC PERSONNEL CONTACT INFORMATION


Dan McCormick (510) 690-6620 Phone (510) 888-9631 Fax
Aquatic Manager (510) 702-3468 Pager dmccormick@ebparks.org
Pete DeQuincy (510) 690-6622 Phone (510) 888-9631 Fax
Aquatic Supervisor - North (510) 702-2016 Pager pdequincy@ebparks.org
Nick Schriver (510) 690-6621 Phone (510) 888-9631 Fax
Aquatic Supervisor - South (510) 702-2500 Pager nschriver@ebparks.org
Aaron Roth (510) 690-6624 Phone (510) 888-9631 Fax
Aquatic Assistant North (510) 702-5073 Pager aroth@ebparks.org
Eric Nurse (510) 690-6623 Phone (510) 888-9631 Fax
Aquatic Assistant South (510) 702-7268 Pager enurse@ebparks.org

PAGER CODES DESCRIPTION (1 9) (1 =low priority 9 =high priority)

11 Short Staffed

22 Go Out Of Service Early

33 Equipment Needed

44 Request To Use An Alternate Rotation

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/03


Last revised 2/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Organization Directions/Descriptions I-2.5

Training Locations
Nike Classroom
17930 Lake Chabot Road, Castro Valley
Directions:
From Oakland. Take 580 east. When you reach San Leandro, take the 150th Avenue/Fairmont exit
and go straight to the second signal light--which will be Fairmont. Turn left on Fairmont and follow
Fairmont up and over a steep hill. Fairmont will turn into Lake Chabot Road on the other side of the
hill. At the bottom of the hill, on your left, will be Lake Chabot Regional Park. A few hundred feet
after the entrance to Lake Chabot Park you will see a low brown sign on your left--Public Safety
Headquarters--turn into this driveway* and follow the winding road up the hill. Directions for the
classroom are listed below.

From Castro Valley. 580 west towards Oakland. Exit Interstate 580 at the 150th Avenue/Fairmont
exit in San Leandro. At the end of the off ramp, proceed thru the stop sign bearing left to the signal at
Fairmont. Turn right onto Fairmont. Follow Fairmont up and over a steep hill. Fairmont will turn into
Lake Chabot Road on the other side of the hill. At the bottom of the hill, on your left, will be Lake
Chabot Regional Park. A few hundred feet after the entrance to Lake Chabot Park, you will see a
low brown sign on your left--Public Safety Headquarters--turn into this driveway* and follow the
winding road up the hill. Directions for the classroom are listed below.
Classroom
As you are nearing the top of the hill on your right is the Lake Chabot Maintenance Yard. Drive
past this entrance to the top of the hill. On the right is Public Safety Headquarters directly
across the street on the left is a small brown building and a parking lot. This is the classroom

Trudeau Training Center


11500 Skyline Blvd., Oakland

Directions:
From Castro Valley. Take the I-580 west exit towards Oakland. Take Hwy.13 toward Berkeley
and exit at Carson St./Redwood Rd. At the four-way stop, cross Carson, and, at the signal make a
right turn on Redwood Rd. Proceed uphill and turn left on Skyline Blvd. The training Center will
be on your right.

FROM Oakland:. Take I-580 east towards Hayward. Exit east (left) on the 35th Ave. exit; 35th
Ave. becomes Redwood Rd. Continue on Redwood Rd. Proceed uphill and turn left on Skyline
Blvd. The training Center will be on your right.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Lifeguard Service Manual
Last revised 2/5/08
Page 1 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Organization Directions/Descriptions I-2.5

Lifeguard Facility Directions and Descriptions


North Region

Contra Loma
1200 Frederickson Lane, Antioch
Directions:
From Oakland: Proceed east on Hwy 24 or north on Hwy 680 to Hwy 4. East on Hwy 4 to Lone Tree Way
exit in Antioch. Turn right onto Lone Tree Way. Turn right on Golf Course Road. Turn right on Frederickson
Lane to Park entrance. The lifeguard station is located in the main service yard adjacent to the beach.

Beach: shallow soft sand on pool plaster base


Swimming allowed: when lifeguards on duty only
Fees: beach access entrance fee and parking fee year round
Swimming area
Shape: oval shaped pool with lap lane on far wall, 69 yards long
Volume: 715,000 gallons
Number of lifeguard chairs: 4
Maximum water depth: 5 feet
Bottom slope: gradual, sand to 1-foot depth, pool bottom thereafter
Water conditions: filtered, chlorinated, pool-like visibility
Facility activities: swimming, boating, fishing, windsurfing, picnicking, etc.

Lake Anza
2501 Grizzly Peak Blvd., Orinda (mail)
Directions:
From Oakland and/or Contra Costa County, take Hwy 24 to Fish Ranch Road exit near the east side of the
Caldecott tunnel. Take Fish Ranch Road north (up the hill) to Grizzly Peak Blvd; turn right on Grizzly Peak
Blvd. Turn right on South Park Drive, turn left on Wildcat Canyon Drive, turn right on Central Park Drive,
turn right on Lake Anza Drive. The beach and lifeguard station are near the end of the last parking lot.

Beach: Deep, soft sand


Swimming allowed: generally March 16 October 31 in swim area only
Fees: for entrance to swimming facility when lifeguards are on duty
Swimming area
Shape: rectangle with large lap lane, approximately 200 feet of shoreline
Number of lifeguard chairs: 2
Maximum water depth: approximately 30 feet
Bottom slope: severe drop off starting in approximately 4 feet of water
Water conditions: seasonal underwater weeds
Facility activities: swimming, picnicking

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Lifeguard Service Manual
Last revised 2/5/08
Page 2 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Organization Directions/Descriptions I-2.5

North Region

Lake Temescal
6502 Broadway Terrace, Oakland (mail)

Directions:
The park is near the Hwy. 24/Hwy. 13 interchange. From downtown Oakland, take Hwy. 24 east to Broadway
exit. Travel east on Broadway parallel to Hwy 24, the north park entrance will be on the right side of the road.
The beach and lifeguard station are reached by following the footpath at the east end of the parking lot.

Beach: moderately course sand


Swimming allowed: generally March 16 through October 31 in swim area only
Fees: for entrance to swimming facility when lifeguards are on duty and parking fee on
weekends
Swimming area
Shape: rectangle with lap lane, approximately 300 feet of shoreline
Number of lifeguard chairs: 3
Maximum water depth: approximately 12 feet
Bottom slope: moderate to severe drop off in approximately 4 feet of water
Water conditions: generally calm, with seasonal underwater plant issues
Facility activities: swimming, fishing, picnicking, etc.

Roberts Pool
10570 Skyline Blvd., Oakland

Directions:
From Hwy 13 north or southbound exit at Joaquin Miller Road. Proceed uphill on Joaquin Miller, turn left on
Skyline Blvd. The park entrance is approximately 1 mile up Skyline Blvd. The lifeguard station is adjacent to
the pool near the park entrance.

Beach: pool deck


Swimming allowed: varies by program, only when lifeguards are on duty
Fees: Parking on weekends and for entrance to pool
Swimming area
Shape: slight trapezoid, 25 yards by 4 lanes
Number of lifeguard chairs: 2
Maximum water depth: approximately 8 feet, volume of 110,000 gallons
Bottom slope: gentle with drop off to deep water (marked by rope)
Water conditions: heated, filtered and chlorinated, generally no hazards
Facility activities: recreation swim, lap swim, swimming lessons, disabled swim, private
reservations

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Organization Directions/Descriptions I-2.5

Diablo Foothills, Castle Rock pool


1700 Castle Rock RoadWalnut Creek, CA 94598
Directions:
Exit I-680 at Ygnacio Valley Road in Walnut Creek and drive east. After about three miles turn right on Walnut Avenue.
After about two miles turn right on Oak Grove Road, then bear right onto Castle Rock Road and follow it to the Orchard
Staging Area on the right. Limited parking is available at the end of Castle Rock Road.

Beach: pool deck


Swimming allowed: varies by program, only when lifeguards are on duty
Fees: Parking on weekends and for entrance to pool
Swimming area
Shape: rectangle, 70x30
Number of lifeguard chairs: 2
Maximum water depth: approximately 8 feet, volume of approx.100,000 gallons
Bottom slope: gentle with drop off to deep water (marked by rope)
Water conditions: heated, filtered and chlorinated, generally no hazards
Facility activities: recreation swim,

South Region
Cull Canyon
18627 Cull Canyon Road, Castro Valley
Directions: http://www.ebparks.org/aquatics/cullcanyon.htm
From Oakland, take Hwy 580 eastbound to the Castro Valley/Center Street exit. Turn left onto Center Street,
turn right onto Castro Valley Blvd., turn left onto Crow Canyon Road, turn left onto Cull Canyon Road to the
main parking lot on the left side of the road. The lifeguard station is adjacent to the swim lagoon, which is
across the footbridge leading from the parking lot.

From Dublin, take Hwy 580 westbound to the Castro Valley Blvd. exit. Turn left onto Castro Valley Blvd.
Turn right onto Crow Canyon Road and follow the directions from there as described above.

Beach: shallow soft sand on concrete base


Swimming allowed: when lifeguards are on duty
Fees: for entrance to swimming area
Swimming area
Shape: oval, approximately 1,093 feet of circumference, .978 acre surface area, 2,000,000
gallon volume, with dock
Number of lifeguard chairs: 4
Maximum water depth: approximately 12 feet
Bottom slope: gradual
Water conditions: filtered and chlorinated, generally no hazards
Facility activities: swimming, picnicking

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Organization Directions/Descriptions I-2.5

South Region
Don Castro
22400 Woodroe Ave, Hayward
Directions: http://www.ebparks.org/aquatics/doncastro.htm
From Oakland, take Hwy 580 eastbound to the Castro Valley/Center Street exit. Turn right onto Center Street,
turn left onto Kelly Street, turn left onto Woodroe Street, the park is at the end of Woodroe. The lifeguard
station is adjacent to the swim lagoon near the main parking lot.

From Dublin, take Hwy 580 westbound to the Castro Valley Blvd. exit. Turn left onto Castro Valley Blvd.
Turn left onto Center Street and follow the directions from there as described above.

Beach: deep course sand


Swimming allowed: when lifeguards are on duty only
Fees: park entrance fee, beach access fee
Swimming area
Shape: oval with approximately 1,000 feet circumference, 1.2 million gallons volume,
50,000 sq. ft. surface area
Number of lifeguard chairs: 4
Maximum water depth: 5 feet
Bottom slope: gradual
Water conditions: filtered and chlorinated, generally no hazards
Facility activities: swimming, picnicking, sand volleyball court

Shadow Cliffs
2500 Stanley Blvd, Pleasanton

Directions: http://www.ebparks.org/aquatics/shadow.htm
Take Hwy 580 to Santa Rita Road exit in Pleasanton. Go south on Santa Rita Road, turn left on Valley Ave,
turn left on Stanley Blvd., to the park entrance on the right side of the road. The lifeguard station is adjacent to
the beach, near the first parking lot.

Beach: deep soft sand


Swimming allowed: year round in swimming area and overall lake with special use permit
Fees: parking fee
Swimming area
Shape: rectangle with lap lane, approximately 350 feet of shoreline
Number of lifeguard chairs: 3
Maximum water depth: approximately 10 feet
Bottom slope: gradual
Water conditions: seasonal underwater weed problem, wind generally off shore
Facility activities: swimming, boating, fishing, windsurfing, picnicking, etc.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 5 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Organization Directions/Descriptions I-2.5

South Region
Del Valle East Beach
7000 Del Valle Rd., Livermore

Directions: http://www.ebparks.org/aquatics/del%20vallee.htm
From Hwy 580 exit N. Livermore Avenue. Take N. Livermore south, it turns into Tesla Road, turn right on
Mines Road, stay right onto Del Valle Road to the park entrance. Turn right just inside the park entrance. The
lifeguard station is adjacent to the beach just off of the third main parking lot.

Beach: gravel, foot protection necessary


Swimming allowed: year round in swimming area when water levels allow and north of
boat launch ramp
Fees: parking fee
Swimming area
Shape: rectangle with approximately 350 feet of shoreline
Number of lifeguard chairs: 3
Maximum water depth: approximately 12 feet
Bottom slope: gradual
Water conditions: strong wind along shore with wind chop
Facility activities: swimming, boating, fishing, windsurfing, picnicking, camping, etc.

Del Valle West Beach


7000 Del Valle Rd., Livermore

Directions: http://www.ebparks.org/aquatics/del%20vallee.htm
Same as above to park entrance. Past the entrance stay straight across a bridge. At the intersection turn right.
The lifeguard station is adjacent to the near edge of the first parking lot; the beach is down a set of stairs near
the station.

Beach: gravel, foot protection necessary


Swimming allowed: year round in swimming area when water levels allow and north of
boat launch ramp
Fees: parking fee
Swimming area
Shape: triangular with approximately 600 feet of shoreline
Number of lifeguard chairs: 5
Maximum water depth: approximately 15 feet
Bottom slope: gradual
Water conditions: wind chop at north end and in deep water, seasonal underwater plants
Facility activities: swimming, boating, fishing, windsurfing, picnicking, camping, etc.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 6 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction Organization Directions/Descriptions I-2.5

South Region
Quarry Lakes
2250 Isherwood Way, Fremont

Directions: http://www.ebparks.org/aquatics/quarryl.htm
From Hwy. 880 in Oakland go south toward Fremont. Take the Fremont Blvd/Alvarado Blvd exit,
turn left onto Fremont Blvd/Alvarado Blvd. Stay straight to go onto Fremont Blvd. Turn left onto
Decoto Rd. Turn right onto Paseo Padre Pkwy. Turn left onto Isherwood Way. The park entrance
will be on the right. Go left after the entrance kiosk to get to the beach.

Beach: course gray sand


Swimming allowed: year round
Fees: parking and swimming entrance
Swimming Area: trapezoid shape with curved shoreline of approximately 600 feet.
Number of Lifeguard Chairs: 5
Maximum depth: approximately 45 feet
Water conditions: changing water levels during season. Fairly steep underwater slope;
wind typically left to right and offshore.
Facility activities: swimming, boating, fishing, windsurfing, picnicking, etc.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 7 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction District Overview I-3.1

District Overview

The East Bay Regional districts General Manager. Six


Park District was founded in departments, headed by Assistant General
1934 with the vision of Managers, divide up and assist the
developing the highest quality General Manager in carrying out the
regional park system in the administrative and operational functions
nation to serve the public. Its continuing of the District. Each department is
vision is to provide accessible parklands divided further into Divisions or other
that preserve the natural and cultural organizational units.
resources of the region while providing
diverse opportunities for education, The Districts General Fund
interpretation and recreation that are safe Operating Budget for 2008 was
and enjoyable for all. approximately $147.3 million. More than
86% of District funding comes from a
Its core mission is to acquire, small percentage of property taxes levied
develop, manage and maintain a high in Alameda and Contra Costa counties.
quality, diverse system of interconnected Park user fees and leases fund
parklands which balance public usage approximately 9% of the budget.
and educational programs while
protecting and preserving the Districts The District employs
natural and cultural resources. approximately 650 permanent, 300 (85.6
full time equivalent) seasonal workers
The Districts organizational each year. Lifeguard staff makes up
structure starts with a publicly elected approximately 170 of these seasonal
seven member Board of Directors. Each workers (34.93 fte).
director represents a Ward. Each Ward
represents a geographical division of the
Districts overall jurisdiction throughout
Alameda and/or Contra Costa counties.
The board determines all questions of
policy.

Overall responsibility for carrying


out these policies rests with the park

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Introduction District Organizational Structure I-3.2

East Bay Regional Park District


Partial Organizational Chart

The purpose of this chart is to show how Aquatics fits within the Districts Public Safety Division
and relates to Unit Manager and Park Supervisors within the Operations Division.
Board of Directors

General Manager
Pat OBrien

AGM Assistant General Assistant General Assistant General Assistant General Assistant General
Management Services Manager Manager Manager Manager Manager
Dave Collins Public Affairs Public Safety Operations Plan, Steward, etc Land Acquisition
Rosemary Cameron Timothy Anderson John Escobar Mike Anderson Bob Doyle

Chief of Fire Chief of Parks


Ken Blonski Operations
Jack Kenny

Aquatics Manager Unit Manager Lakes Unit Manager Unit Manager


Dan McCormick Warren Schultz Parklands Recreation
Jeff Wilson Paul Miller

Aquatic Supervisor Aquatic Supervisor Aquatic Facilities Aquatic Facilities Aquatic Facilities
South Region North Region Contra Loma, Del Tilden (Lake Anza) Don Castro, Cull
Nick Schriver Pete DeQuincy Valle, Shadow Cliffs, Canyon, Temescal,
Quarry Lakes Roberts, Diablo
Foothills (Castle Rock)

Aquatic Assistant Aquatic Assistant


Eric Nurse Aaron Roth
South Region North Region

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Administration
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Time Cards A-1.2

Time Cards

Adhering to the following information and the sample Time Card should ensure
efficient processing of time cards for accurate paycheck production. Lifeguards not
adhering to this information are subject to discipline as well as a delay in receiving
payment for hours worked.

Accuracy

Lifeguards are responsible for seeing that their time card is accurate, complete and
turned in on time.

Time cards should be submitted for each pay period in which hours are worked.

Lifeguards should complete their own time cards.

Recorded hours should be an exact match with the corresponding Daily Sign In/Out
Log. Hours should be recorded in quarter hour increments by rounding up or down to the
nearest quarter hour.

The person making the correction should initial information that is written over, or
crossed out.

Because time cards are due before the end of the pay period, it is often necessary to
estimate hours for days to be worked at the end of a pay period. Estimations should be
made according to the posted Lifeguard Service Schedule and current trends in visitation
and weather. Each lifeguard is responsible for tracking and reporting differences between
actual hours worked and estimated hours. For reporting over and under estimations see the
Retroactive Hours section below.

Distribution

Lifeguards should use a computer to produce their time card, using the lifeguard
template and printing it on buff color paper. A copy should be kept on file on site for
reference by the submitting lifeguard and the PIC. The original is turned into the Aquatic
Supervisor after receiving Head Guard approval. After approving, the Aquatic Supervisor
will file a copy and send the completed buff original to Payroll for processing.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/1/02


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Time Cards A-1.2

Budget Codes

It is important to use proper budget codes in order to ensure that budgets are debited
accurately. All reported hours require a department code, location code and object code.
Project codes should be recorded when applicable. All project codes need an accompanying
task code.

For information regarding reporting shift differential see Reference # A-1.6 -- Shift
Differential.

Fund Code
Aquatic department expenditures us fund code 101

Department Codes

The Lifeguard Service Department code is 8320

Location Codes

The location codes for lifeguarded facilities are:


South Region
Cull Canyon 239
Del Valle 203
Don Castro 255
Quarry Lakes 242
Shadow Cliffs 281

North Region
Contra Loma 260
Diablo Foothills 156
Lake Anza 105
Lake Temescal 240
Roberts 124

Object codes

The object code for regular lifeguard wages is 4475.


The object code for lifeguard overtime is 4119.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/1/02


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Time Cards A-1.2

Project Codes

The Project Code should be used when a lifeguards task falls under one of the
following codes.

The Project Codes are:


Disabled Fishing Derbies 800016
Del Valle East 800025
Del Valle West 800026
Swim Lessons 800027
Special Events 800030
Lifeguard Academy 800031
Junior Lifeguards 800032
Alternate Responsibilities 800609

Because the time card has space for only one project code, when a lifeguard works at Del
Valle with alternate responsibilities, they should use that project code only (800609) not
the Del Valle East or West project codes. More information see LSM A-1.8 Secondary
Assignments.

Task Codes

The task code 602 should follow all project codes of expenditures.

Time Card Comments

Record comments in the "comments" section of the time card.

Comments should explain any unusual circumstances including days with more
than 10 hours of work. See the following sample time card for examples.

In order to help identify hours for commented items, all comments should begin
with the date on the time card where the hours are recorded. They should then provide a
brief explanation of what occurred.

When a lifeguard is given a secondary assignment that includes alternate


responsibilities they need to be sure to place the hours in the RO Assignments section of
the time card. An appropriate comment should also be placed in the comments section. See
the sample time card for more information.

Overtime
Overtime hours should be entered in the Overtime section of the time card.
Retroactive Hours

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/1/02


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Time Cards A-1.2

Retroactive hours need to be considered for each timecard submitted. If retroactive


hours were not accrued during the previous pay period, then Retro N/A should be written
in the comments section.

Retroactive hours need to be reported in the pay period immediately following the
pay period in which over or underestimation of hours occurred.

Overestimated hours should be preceded by a minus sign (-).

Retroactive hours need to be coded with the same coding that was originally used to
report the over or underestimated hours. A summary of all retroactive hours should be
recorded on the first day of the new time card. An explanation for each retroactive action
should be provided in the comments section. See the sample time card for more
information.

Retroactive hours may not be submitted in lieu of a previous pay periods timecard.
A timecard needs to be submitted for each payperiod.

Deadlines

Time cards are due to the Person in Charge on Tuesday morning prior to the pay
period ending date or earlier when necessary.

Time cards are due to Aquatic Supervisors at the Wednesday, Supervisors Staff
Meetings held throughout the summer or as otherwise requested.

Person In Charge

The Person in Charge is responsible for reviewing time cards that are submitted by
their employees.

The review should insure that:

The Fund, Department, Object, Project and Task columns are properly
completed.

The Lifeguard Daily Log and Visiting Lifeguard Hours Confirmation forms
match the reported hours. (To confirm off-site training and meeting hours,
check with the Aquatic Supervisor in charge of that function). Estimated
hours from the previous pay period were reviewed and the necessary
retroactive actions were recorded accurately. If no retroactive corrections
were needed, Retro N/A should be recorded in the comments column.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/1/02


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Time Cards A-1.2

Each comment begins with a date. Handwriting is neat and legible where
applicable.

An Expense Report, Visiting Lifeguard Hours Confirmation form and/or


Request for Change of Assignment form (indicating an approved directed
transfer) is attached to each employee time card (when applicable).

Comments are filled in correctly

Totals are calculated correctly. This will be done automatically if by using


the time card template.

The time card is complete and accurate

Once the review is complete, the Person in Charge is responsible for initialing the
time card next to the employees signature.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/1/02


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 5 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Instructor Reimbursement A-1.3

Instructor Reimbursement
Having appropriate lifeguard staff certified as American Red Cross Instructors is important to
maintaining quality aspects of the Aquatics unit. These guidelines outline reimbursement levels,
eligibility, and procedures. Eligibility determination and prior authorization is required for this
program. It can be obtained from the Aquatics Manager.

1) Instructions/criteria for reimbursement of fees and hours (All Lifeguards):


a) Prior approval must be requested and granted by the Aquatics Manager
i) Approval criteria will include, but not be limited to:
(1) Prior work performance
(2) Aquatic Supervisor recommendation
(3) Head Lifeguard recommendation
(4) Lead Swim Instructor recommendation
(5) Instructor needs
(6) Likelihood of making significant contribution to the Aquatics unit
ii) Classes may be taken during the off-season
b) Completion of expense report (101-8320-000-6902) required for reimbursement of fees:
i) Complete with receipt for fees and books
ii) Attach a copy of the course description, flyer, or brochure
iii) Attach a copy of ARC Instructor certificate (front and back)
(1) Certificate must have ARCBA authorization
iv) Expense report due 30 days after last day of course
v) Late or incomplete expense reports may be denied
vi) Expense reports will be processed once all reimbursement criteria have been met
(including completion of swim instructor work commitment if applicable)
c) Completion of time card required for reimbursement of hours:
i) Time card comments must clearly identify class days and hours
ii) Eligible reimbursement hours must be reported on time card as soon as all reimbursement
criteria have been met (including completion of instructor work commitment if
applicable)
iii) Late or incomplete time cards may be denied

2) Reimbursement level for Head Lifeguards:


a) Reimbursed for registration fee, books, and certificate fees up to $200
b) Reimbursed at regular pay rate for up to 50% of recommended class time hours

3) Reimbursement level for all other Lifeguards:


a) Reimbursed for registration fee, books, and certificate fees up to $150
b) Reimbursed at regular pay rate for up to 33% of recommended class time hours

4) Minimum instructor work commitment required:


i) For WSI reimbursement
(1) Must teach minimum of three two-week sessions to qualify for reimbursement

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/2/04


Last Revised: 12/9/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Instructor Reimbursement A-1.3

(2) Sessions must be worked during the summer immediately following certification
b) For other ARC Instructor reimbursement
i) Must teach either
(1) 2 Junior Lifeguard Sessions
ii) Must teach any combination of 3 days at:
(1) First aid, CPR, Lifeguarding classes, or Lifeguard Academy

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/2/04


Last Revised: 12/9/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Holiday Pay A-1.4

Holiday Pay

The source for this policy is Article 35(c) of the Agreement with AFSCME Local 2428 dated
March 28, 1998.

Policy: Seasonal employees in the classification Lifeguards will


be entitled to receive holiday pay for the holidays which occur
during the Districts full aquatic season. These holidays will
include Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,
Admissions Day, and Columbus Day. Lifeguards who work on
a scheduled holiday will receive 8 hours of straight time pay for
the holiday in addition to regular pay for hours worked on that
holiday. Lifeguards who are not scheduled to work on a holiday,
but work at least 80 hours during the month in which the
holiday occurs, will receive 8 hours of straight time holiday pay.

Filling Out a Time Card

Holiday hours should be reported on the Holiday line of the time card. Lifeguards who work
on the holiday should report the holiday pay on the holidays date. For more information see
Reference #A-1.2 -- Time Cards.

When filling out your time card for Holiday pay earned by working 80 hours in the month:
If you have worked 80 hours prior to the holiday, record holiday pay on the holidays
date and make a note in the comments section of your time card regarding this.
If you have worked 80 hours after the holiday, record holiday pay on the day you reach
the required 80 hours and make a note in the comments section of your time card
regarding this.

Person in Charge

In instances where holiday pay is reported for working 80 hours in a month, use copies of
previous time cards to verify entitlement.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Mileage Reimbursement A-1.5

Mileage Reimbursement

The source for this policy is the Districts Personnel Administrative Manual.

Policy
Travel for local District business may be by personal vehicle when a District vehicle is
unavailable; however, employees may not be required to use their private vehicle for District
purposes.

In order to use a private vehicle for District purposes the following four conditions must be
met:
1. The employee must have insurance coverage not less than the minimum required by
the State of California, $15,000/$30,000 liability and $5,000 property damage.
2. The employees vehicle must be in good mechanical condition.
3. The Aquatic Supervisor must approve use of the vehicle.
4. The employee must have a valid California drivers license for their vehicles class.

Eligible trips for mileage reimbursement

The following trips are reimbursable under this policy:


Directed temporary assignments
Special events
Meetings

Ineligible trips for mileage reimbursement

The following trips are not eligible for mileage reimbursement:


In-house training classes
Hiring requirements such as testing, interviews, 550 swim retakes, finger
printing, medical exams
Doctor visits for on the job injury (submit claims via workers compensation)
Voluntary temporary assignments (for more information see reference # O-1.5
Change of Assignment)

BART Travel Expense


Reimbursements for BART travel expenses that meet the Directed Temporary
Change of Assignment criteria in Reference # O-1.5 are allowed. A receipt is required and
should be attached to an expense report and submitted as indicated in Reimbursement
Method below.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Mileage Reimbursement A-1.5

Calculating mileage

All mileage should be taken from odometer readings and rounded to the nearest mile.

Mileage from one work site to another work site is reimbursable in full. This is reported as
Total miles on an Expense Report. Total miles is actual miles traveled without deducting
regular travel distance. The following Mileage Matrix can be used as a guide.

When a reimbursable trip begins or ends at home, additional miles are reimbursable.

Additional miles = Actual miles traveled regular travel distance.


Regular travel distance is defined as the distance traveled from home
to a lifeguards regular work assignment.

When a reimbursable trip begins at an off duty location other than home:
Regular travel distance is deducted from the mileage you travel, by
deviating from your normal route home, to reach the temporary work
assignment. When returning home from these assignments,
reimbursable mileage is calculated by deducting regular travel
distance from the miles traveled to reach your regular route home.

Reimbursement method
Submit a properly completed Expense Report to the Lifeguard III with your time card. These
are due at the end of each pay period in which the mileage expense was accrued. Late Expense
Reports may cause the claim to be denied. Any expense report submitted 90 days or more after
the expense occurred will be denied except under very special circumstances. See the following
sample Expense Report.

When filling out the Expense Report:


Date refers to the date of travel.
One line is used for each trip direction.
The description line must state where the trip begins and ends and specify if the
total miles or additional miles standard was applied.
The mileage column must show the reimbursement calculation. For example,
when the additional miles standard is applied the calculation should read, (28
mi. 14 mi.) x $.32 (applicable reimbursement rate). If the total mileage
standard is applied the calculation should read, 9 mi. x $.32 (applicable
reimbursement rate).

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Mileage Reimbursement A-1.5

The cost code should indicate the correct Department code (8320), followed by
the Location code of the requesting facility, followed by the Meals and Travel
Object code (6511), followed by any relevant project and task code.

Reimbursement Rate

The reimbursement rate for eligible miles will be equal to the official rate adopted by the
Internal Revenue Service for mileage deductions. See the Financial Reference Sheet posted in the
lifeguard station for more information.

Person in Charge

The Lifeguard III is responsible for reviewing the Expense Report for accuracy and
approving it with their initials.

The Expense Report should be turned in with the time cards to the Aquatic Supervisor
according to the time card deadlines.

Reimbursable travel should be kept to a minimum by:


Adhering to posted schedules
Making full use of regular staff first
Asking for volunteers who may want to visit another facility or work additional hours
Requesting visiting lifeguards from nearby facilities
Car pooling whenever possible

If you have a consistent need for visiting lifeguards bring it to the attention of the Aquatic
Supervisor. It may be necessary to adjust staff assignments.

Drive Time
Drive time:
Is accrued while driving reimbursable miles.
Should be rounded to the nearest quarter hour.
Is charged to the visiting facilitys budget when traveling to another facility.
Is charged to the regular facility budget for all other eligible travel.

Make sure your drive time is recorded on the bottom of the Lifeguard Daily Sign In/Out
log of the facility being charged.

For more information on recording drive time on your time card see Reference # A-1.2 --
Time Cards.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Mileage Reimbursement A-1.5

Mileage Reimbursement

Lifeguard Services Mileage Matrix

DC SC DV Tilden Tem CL Cull Rob Nike PO QL Trud DF


DC 0 17 30 24 17 46 3 17 6 10 12 15 27
SC 17 0 15 38 32 40 16 30 19 23 19 30 29
DV 30 15 0 46 44 41 30 43 32 37 31 31 43
Tilden 24 38 46 0 8 39 24 14 21 16 32 11 19
Tem 17 32 44 8 0 38 17 8 16 10 26 5 18
CL 46 40 41 39 38 0 44 42 48 44 58 38 21
Cull 3 16 30 24 17 44 0 16 3 8 14 15 26
Rob 17 30 43 14 8 42 16 0 13 8 23 1 23
Nike 6 19 32 21 16 48 3 13 0 6 15 11 31
PO 10 23 37 16 10 44 10 8 6 0 18 7 27
QL 12 19 31 32 26 58 14 23 15 18 0 25 42
Trud 15 30 31 11 5 38 15 1 11 7 25 0 23
DF 27 29 43 19 18 21 26 23 31 27 42 23 0

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Shift Differential A-1.6

Shift Differential
Lifeguard shift differential is a 13.8% increase in pay applied to instruction hours by
lifeguards. It was instituted in 1994 as a way to compensate staff for the additional skills and
certifications necessary to instruct authorized District classes.

For more information, see Article 35.1 (e) of the Agreement between the East Bay
Regional Park District and Local 2428 of AFSCME.

Eligible Tasks

Shift differential is authorized for lifeguards while they are instructing public or non-
lifeguard District staff in aquatic and safety programs.

Swimming lessons, Junior Lifeguard program, non-lifeguard CPR and First Aid
certification classes are common examples where shift differential applies.

Filling out a Time Card

Shift differential hours should be reported on the SHIFT DIFF line of the time card.
The comments section should indicate the budget code for which shift differential should be applied.
Reference # A-1.2 Time Cards has more information and an example of recording shift differential
hours.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/13/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Pay Steps A-1.7

Pay Steps

Lifeguard wages and step increases are covered in Article 35 of the Agreement between the
District and Local 2428 of AFSCME and the Personnel Administrative Manual.

Lifeguards will receive credit for step increases for each hour of work within a classification
that is reported on their time card and approved by their Aquatic Supervisor.

A minimum of 750 hours of work typically make a lifeguard eligible for a step increase.

Lifeguards promoted to a higher classification will begin at the first pay step of the higher
classification.

Hours worked in a higher classification will apply to pay step determination when a lifeguard
goes to a lower classification (notwithstanding disciplinary matters).

As it affects pay steps, lifeguards will typically maintain their returning lifeguard status for
one year following their last season of work. After that time, they will likely be required to attend the
Lifeguard Academy and begin at the beginning pay step.

Supervisors have the authority and responsibility to recommend withholding step


advancements if they are not merited. Employees shall be kept informed about their
job performance. Deficient employees shall be given reasonable guidance and
assistance toward improvement.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Secondary Assignment A-1.8

Secondary Assignment
Secondary assignments involve temporarily filling in for an absent position in order to meet
chain of command objectives.

An Aquatic Supervisor, Aquatics Manager or their representative, will authorize secondary


assignments.

A typical secondary assignment is being Person In Charge (PIC) at a facility. For more
information see Reference # O-1.3 Person In Charge.

Lifeguards are eligible for compensation at the prescribed rate of the position they are filling
in for during the time they work in a secondary assignment. A secondary assignment entails duties
that are not a part of the lifeguards regular classification.

Eligible positions and pay rates for secondary assignments are listed in the following table:

Absent Position Classification Pay Rate


PIC Lifeguard II Step A
Aquatic Assistant or Aquatic Supervisor Lifeguard III Step C

Filling in as an instructor for classes that meet the criteria of LSM reference # A-1.6 will
receive shift differential reimbursement at their regular classification rate. This is not applicable to
the secondary assignment criteria.

Filling Out a Time Card

Lifeguards are to put secondary assignment hours on the RO Assignments section of their
time card. An appropriate comment should be placed in the comments section. For more information
see Reference # A-1.2 Time Cards.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 9/1/04


Last Revised: 12/9/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Overtime A-1.9

Overtime

The labor agreement with AFSCME 2428, Article 35 reads:


(f) Overtime Pay. Lifeguards shall be compensated for overtime work in excess of 45 hours in any work
week if authorized in advance by their supervisor. Such overtime shall be paid at one and one-half the
employees regular rate.

Following are some helpful guidelines in understanding how to apply this provision.

1. Per the Personnel Administrative Manual 5.01A, the work week is from 00:01 Saturday thru
24:00 Friday.

2. Scheduling lifeguards for overtime needs Aquatic Supervisor approval. Approval should come
from the Aquatic Supervisor who is affected by the overtime.

3. During emergencies or urgent situations, the PIC should continue to error on the side of safety
and good customer service during the time between when a decision needs to be made and
explicit Aquatic Supervisor approval is given or denied.

4. Last minute schedule adjustments that extend scheduled lifeguard service hours should follow
the procedure outlined in LSM O-1.7 Extension and Reduction of Lifeguard Service Hours.

5. Lifeguard schedules should denote scheduled overtime hours with a $ symbol in the schedule
box for the day in which overtime is earned.

6. The 8 hour holiday pay that lifeguards earn in accordance with Article 35.1 (c) of the Labor
Agreement is not considered hours worked for overtime calculation.

7. Overtime (1 times regular rate) is calculated on a lifeguards regular rate. This regular rate
will be used to calculate pay whether a lifeguard is performing a regular or a secondary
assignment. SHLF is also calculated on a lifeguards regular rate. SHLF and OT rates are applied
separately to the regular rate, not in combination.

8. The object code for OT is 4119. Other coding criterion remains the same.

9. Time cards should note the reason for OT in the comments section. The reference date to the
overtime should be the date of the unusual occurrence that triggered the cause for OT to be
earned later in the pay period.

10. Total OT hours on the time card will be circled by the time card template formatting.

11. Retro hours affect OT in the pay period during which they were worked, not the time card pay
period on which they are recorded.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/06


Last Revised: 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Compensation Overtime A-1.9

12. If you overestimate OT, retro hours should note reduction of the overtime rate on the next time
card.

13. Typically OT will occur (and be recorded) on the last day or so of the lifeguards work week.

For a sample time card showing how overtime is recorded can be found in LSM reference # A-1.2 Time
Cards.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/06


Last Revised: 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel Vacation/Sick Leave A-2.1

Vacation and Sick Leave

Lifeguards do not accrue vacation time, sick leave or compensating time.

Time off is taken without pay.

Time off will not normally be given to lifeguards during the following periods:
Memorial Day weekend
July 4 weekend
Labor Day weekend

The guidelines in LSM O-1.4 Requesting Time Off/Changes should be followed when requesting
time off.

Illness
If a lifeguard becomes ill while on duty, the Person in Charge must be notified immediately.

It is important to be completely alert and fit while lifeguarding. If illness will cause a lifeguard to
miss work, they need to notify the Person in Charge as soon as possible so that a substitute can be
found. If a lifeguard is unable to reach the Person in Charge, they should contact the Aquatic
Supervisor via pager.

Absences due to illness in excess of 3 consecutive work days must be verified in writing by the
employees doctor. In lieu of such medical verification the Aquatic Manager may accept the
employees signed statement concerning the nature of his/her illness.

Per the Personnel Administrative Manual, Appendix C, Ethical Guidelines Policy: Any employee who is
taking medication which may impair his/her ability to work safely and efficiently must inform his/her
supervisor.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/22/06


Last Revised 2/22/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel Orientation A-2.2

Check-in and Orientation


Check-In
Check-in is a process during which an employee completes some basic and necessary aspects
of hiring.

This includes issuing a uniform, keys (where applicable), safety gear and completing
pertinent forms and procedures such as a Personnel Change Form (PCF), an Employee Confidential
Personal Record Form, a W-4, a Pre-employment Physical, finger printing, verification of
employment eligibility, etc.

The pre-employment physical is to be completed prior to the first 45 hours of work in a


season.

Various aspects of Check-in are conducted by Human Resources with the remaining done by
a facility PIC and the Aquatic Supervisor. Lifeguards are notified how to complete check-in during
the hiring process.

The following are instructions for PICs to follow for completing the check-in and skill
review process on returning lifeguards. Questions should be directed to an Aquatic Supervisor.

Check-in and Skill Review Process


1. A lifeguard is only eligible to check-in if they have been placed on the hiring pool. Check with
your Aquatic Supervisor to verify eligibility.

2. Give lifeguard an orientation folder and review its contents and expectations with them:
a) Right Pocket (information for them to keep)
i) Check-in Meeting agenda
ii) Lifeguard Pre-Employment Physical Appointment assignment
(1) Candidate calls and schedules own appointment.
(2) Must be done within the first 45 hours of work or July 1st (whichever comes first).
(3) TB test must be taken and read every other year.
iii) Important Events/Lifeguard Service Schedule
iv) Lifeguard Service Contact Numbers
v) Pre-season calendar (for recording personal scheduling commitments)
vi) USLA membership information/application
vii) Junior Lifeguard brochure
viii) Roberts Swim Program brochure
b) Left Pocket (to be completed and turned in)
i) Updated Employee Confidential Data Sheet (only fill our if changes need to be made)
ii) Direct Deposit (optional, but highly recommended)
iii) W-4

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel Orientation A-2.2

iv) Returning Lifeguard Tracking Sheet


3. If applicable, provide lifeguard with these additional forms (included in Employee Form Box):
a. Work permit application (for minors, due first day of work)
b. Consent to Treatment of Minor (for minors, due first day of work)
c. Uniform request form (if they did not previously turn one in)
4. If interested, provide the lifeguard with these optional forms (included in Employee Form Box):
a. Hepatitis B Interest/Appointment form (to receive hepatitis B vaccination)
b. Personal Physician Form (to designate a personal physician)

5. Skill Review

A) Each returning lifeguard is required to show proficiency in the following skills:


1. Rescue using a rescue tube
2. Rescue using a rescue board
3. One of the following:
Adult CPR/AED skills
Child CPR/AED skills
Infant CPR skills

B) The skills review must be completed on the first day in which the lifeguard works. If
it is not possible to complete the skill review on the first day back for an individual
lifeguard you must contact the appropriate Aquatic Supervisor or Aquatic Assistant to
schedule another day to perform the skill review.

C) The PIC is responsible for administering the skill review to each lifeguard. The PIC
will designate someone to administer the skill review to the PIC. The skill review
will be administered using the Returning Lifeguard Skill Review Packet found in
the Employee File Folder Box. The PIC will have every lifeguard perform the rescue
tube and rescue board skills. The PIC will choose one of the three CPR scenarios for
each lifeguard. The PIC should rotate between adult, child, and infant skills so that
no two lifeguards in a row get the same scenario.

D) If a lifeguard does not get a passing score on any skill, the PIC should advise and
provide direction on how to successfully complete the skill. The lifeguard should
then be retested on the skill. The lifeguard should be retested until they successfully
complete the skill. The PIC should contact the Aquatic Supervisor or Aquatic
Assistant if a lifeguard is unable to successfully complete a skill after a second
attempt.

6. *** IMPORTANT*** Telephone the on duty Aquatic Supervisor and advise them that
the candidate successfully completed the check-in and skill review process.

7. Collect all completed check-in and skill review forms and submit to the appropriate Aquatic
Supervisor ASAP.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel Orientation A-2.2

PIC Lifeguard
Check-in process
Yes Lifeguard in No
Hiring Pool
per Aquatic
Supervisor?

Schedule to come in for check-in and Applicant check with HR re:


testing application status for hiring pool

On test day:
Review check in packet with
candidate
Complete check-in forms

Pass 3 skill No
Yes checks?
(2 tries)

PHONE on duty Aquatic Supervisor Advise the lifeguard THEY ARE


and advise that the lifeguard NOT OK to work and contact
completed their check-in forms and Aquatic Supervisor
passed the skill review. Advise
lifeguard THEY ARE OK to work and
can contact their Head Guard for
scheduling

Send completed check-in forms and


skill review packet to the appropriate
regional Aquatic Supervisor

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel Orientation A-2.2

Orientation
New employee orientation occurs at the Lifeguard Academy, during the first few days at
their facility assignment and at appropriate times during the season. Each employee should read and
understand the policies contained in the Lifeguard Service Manual as part of their orientation.

Person in Charge
A site specific facility orientation should be done for each lifeguard. The following list of
items should be included:

Show the location of:


Lifeguard Service forms
Employee information bulletin board
First aid supplies
Lifesaving equipment
Paperwork and office supplies
Reference materials
Community spaces and supplies

Explain:
Staff introductions
Mail system
Computer system
Paperwork processing and filing system
Alarm system and procedure
Telephone and voice mail
Park specific procedures for lost and found articles
Answers to the publics commonly asked questions
Any special notification procedures for tardiness, absence, etc.

Conduct a facility tour including:


Emergency vehicle access and gates
Explain specific coordination issues with park staff during emergencies
Typical helicopter landing zones
Park office location
Parking locations for personal vehicles
Beach and swim area hazards
Location of rule signs
Picnic areas and trails near the beach
Public restroom location
Public telephone location

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel Orientation A-2.2

Concession stand location


Boat dock
Chlorine and filter room

New Lifeguard Orientation


Guidelines for conducting new lifeguard orientation can be found at Reference # O-5.6 New
Lifeguard On-site Training.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 5 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel Minors A-2.3

Minors

Minors are employees who are under 18 years old. Various employment laws and District
policies affect these individuals. It is important that minor employees know and follow the
restrictions placed on their employment. They are also expected to be active in not violating their
work permit and alerting their Lifeguard III of any potential problems. However, it is the
responsibility of the employer to follow the work permit restrictions.

Person in Charge

Each minor needs to have:


A valid original work permit (where applicable) on file in the lifeguard station.
A completed Consent to Treat a Minor form on file in the lifeguard station. This
form needs to be readily available so that it can go with a minor anytime they
are sent to a medical facility for treatment of an on the job injury.
A copy of both of these forms will be kept in the employees Personnel file in
Human Resources.

Typically a minor's work schedule is more restricted than for other employees. These
restrictions may vary according to the minor's work permit, but they generally restrict the employee
to 8 hours of work per day and a maximum number of hours of work per week.
It is extremely important to follow the restrictions detailed on the work permit when
scheduling and also anticipate the expiration of the work permit if it will occur during the lifeguard
season.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel Certificates A-2.4

Certificate Requirements
District lifeguards meet, maintain and, in general, exceed the State of Californias training
requirements for lifeguards.
Returning Lifeguard I, II and III must continuously maintain the certificates listed under
minimum qualifications in their job descriptions in order to be eligible for work.
For a returning Lifeguard I this includes the following certificates:
A current CPR/AED for the Professional Rescuer (r.06) (CPRO/AED) certificate
from the American Red Cross or American Heart Association or its equivalent
(equivalent certificate validity period will be recognized as one year from course
completion date) and
A current First Aid certificate that meets the State of California Health and Safety
Code (Title 22) requirements, and
A current Waterfront Lifeguarding certificate from the American Red Cross or its
equivalent
For Lifeguard II and III this includes the following certificates:
A current CPR/AED for the Professional Rescuer (r.06) (CPRO/AED) certificate
from the American Red Cross or American Heart Association or its equivalent
(equivalent certificate validity period will be recognized as one year from course
completion date) and
A current Emergency Response certificate from the American Red Cross or
Emergency Medical Technician (EMT) certificate or its equivalent, and
A current Waterfront Lifeguarding certificate from the American Red Cross or its
equivalent
Lifeguard candidates are not required to possess any certificates in order to apply and/or take
the physical test for the position of Lifeguard I.
Lifeguards who successfully complete the Lifeguard Academy and continue employment
with us will be awarded the following American Red Cross certificates:
Waterfront Lifeguarding
First aid for Public Safety Personnel (r. 03)
CPR/AED for the Professional Rescuer (r. 06) (CPRO/AED)

The certificates listed above (or their equivalent) and successful completion of the Lifeguard
Academy is required for deployment as a lifeguard.
During each season, lifeguards have the opportunity to be scheduled to attend re-certification
reviews in Waterfront Lifeguarding, CPRO/AED, and either First aid for Public Safety Personnel (r.
03) or Emergency Response. For more information see Reference # O-5.3 Certification Classes.

Conditions of Employment
Lifeguards must continuously meet the conditions of employment listed in their job
description. In summary, lifeguards may be required to wear uniforms (see Reference A-4.1
Uniforms for more information), work unusual hours, weekends, and holidays (see Reference A-2.5
for more information). They must be able to pass a medical examination, fingerprint background
check and continuous skill audits. Lifeguards must participate in a minimum of 16 hours of formal

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel Certificates A-2.4

rescue skills training per season. Lifeguards will be limited to 900 hours of work each fiscal year
(July 1 through June 30) with a possible exception to 999 hours with Human Resource Manager
appoval. Lifeguards have limited representation by Local 2428, American Federation of State,
County & Municipal Employees (AFSCME), AFL-CIO.

Part-Time Lifeguards
Lifeguards who have part-time availability will be required to work a total of 13 days in which they
attend morning training or the Lifeguard Academy. The 13 days are in addition to mandatory
training such as the Lifeguarding Review and First Aid for Public Safety Personnel (r. 03) or
Emergency Response training as appropriate. This requirement is intended in part to meet USLA
Recurring Training Standards, staffing, and scheduling needs. In order for Part-Time Lifeguards to
achieve a Satisfactory rating in the area of "Attendance/Punctuality," on the Report of Performance
for Seasonal Lifeguards they must meet this requirement, which will be used as performance criteria
for rehire.

Returning Lifeguards

A returning lifeguard is an EBRPD lifeguard who worked the previous season as a lifeguard for the
District. Returning lifeguards do not need to attend the Lifeguard Academy. A lifeguard will
typically maintain their returning lifeguard status after taking one season off from the District.

Knowledge Skills and Abilities


Knowledge of correct English usage, including spelling, grammar and punctuation, sufficient to
write reports and forms. After successful completion of the Districts Lifeguard Academy,
knowledge of lifeguarding. Ability to swim 550 yards (500 meters) over a measured course in 10
minutes or less. Ability to operate and maintain lifesaving equipment. Ability to effectively teach
aquatic and safety programs to varying age levels. Ability to walk, run, jump, climb, swim, dive, sit,
lift and carry equipment weighing up to 60 pounds, lift overhead and balance equipment weighing
up to 40 pounds, and work outdoors in the sun for prolonged periods of time. Ability to breath-hold
dive to 15 feet and recover 150 pound person while wearing mask and fins in an open water
environment. Ability to understand and apply District and department policies, procedures,
protocols, and pertinent local and state regulations relating to lifeguard operations and emergency
procedures. Ability to establish and maintain positive working relationships with those contacted in
the course of work at all levels, including a culturally diverse public, with a focus on quality service
to internal and external customers.
United States Lifesaving Association (USLA)
The Districts lifeguard training program and standards are certified as meeting the USLAs
minimum recommended guidelines for open water lifeguard agencies. The USLA is a nationally
recognized authority on open water lifesaving standards. These recommended guidelines cover
personnel, training, and equipment standards and have been incorporated into District policies.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel Availability A-2.5

Availability
Lifeguards are seasonal employees who provide a vital safety service and are thus needed
when the demand for public swimming is highest. Consequently work hours will vary to meet the
needs of the District; lifeguards will be required to work unusual hours, weekends and holidays. Due
to variable weather, water conditions and crowd demands there is no guarantee of minimum hours.

The District typically provides lifeguard service from the week before Easter through the
second week in October.

Because of the safety service provided, requests for time off work (beyond regular days off)
can be granted only after the Districts staffing needs are met.

During the job application process a work availability form is submitted as part of an
application supplement. Hiring the candidate who notifies the District of limits to their availability
on this form does not guarantee approval of time off. It is used by the District as information in
determining hiring needs. Lifeguards need to inform their Lifeguard III of any exceptions to their
availability as early in the season as possible so that the schedules can be covered. For more
information see Reference O-1.4 -- Requesting Time Off/Changes.

Lifeguards are required to submit a Work Schedule Availability Sheet for pre-season (before
mid-June), peak-season (mid-June to late August) and post-season (after late August) scheduling
periods. These availability sheets are used to help develop schedules but indicating time-off requests
on these forms does not guarantee approval.

Lifeguards are required to submit a Last Day of Work Statement to their Head Lifeguard
when assigned. The Statement is used to determine lifeguard work availability after lifeguard service
ends for the season.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/3/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel 550 Swim Retakes A-2.6

Retaking the 550 Swim

The ability to complete the 550-yard swim in 10 minutes or less is a condition of employment for
lifeguards. Anyone who fails the test in open water at a Lifeguard Challenge may re-take the test at
Roberts or Contra Loma.

Swim Test Re-take Times

M-F Sat Sun

Roberts 8:15 9:45 AM 9:15 10:45 AM


5:30 7:30 PM
Contra Loma 10 AM 7:15 PM N/A

Test dates will be determined by the employees supervisor.

The test is to be re-taken at one of these pools within 5 days of the initial test in the open water.

Lifeguards should call ahead to let staff know when theyd like to retest.

Those failing the test in this controlled environment will be taken off the schedule for 3 weeks.

The lifeguard may re-take the test within 2 weeks and, if they pass, may be placed back on the
schedule at the end of the 3rd week. If the employee fails their 3rd attempt (one openwater, two
pool), steps will likely be taken to terminate the employee for failing to meet minimum
qualifications.

Repeat testing, outside the Lifeguard Challenge format, is done without compensation.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 7/5/05


Last Revised: 2/6/08

Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1


Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance Discipline A-3.1

Discipline

Disciplinary action for lifeguards is governed by this manual section and the Districts
Personnel Administrative Manual policy 3.19, Disciplinary Actions. While not technically part of
the disciplinary process, lifeguards are also entitled to the provisions of Article 11.1 of the labor
agreement with Local 2428. Article 11.1 (c) allows for a Pre-disciplinary notice and meeting in the
event the District intends to discharge, impose a suspension without pay or demote a lifeguard who
has completed their provisional hire status.

In general, the purpose of discipline is to teach or develop staff by instruction. It is another


tool for the supervisor to use in order to guide their subordinates to good performance. Some other
supervisory tools are informal discussions, coaching and/or in-service training. Each supervisor has
the authority and responsibility to take appropriate disciplinary actions.

The goal is to consistently apply the disciplinary process because doing so will typically
insure that good employee relation principles are met. These principles place responsibility on both
the supervisor and subordinate. District policies are to be consistently and evenly enforced. No
disciplinary action should be undertaken prior to the supervisor being assured they have the facts of
the incident. Discipline is to be applied in a timely manner, avoiding unnecessary delays.

Deciding appropriate discipline is a subjective task for the supervisor; some performance
issues may result in immediate employee discharge, while others may go through various stages of
progressive discipline. Because of the punitive element of discipline, the severity of the
inappropriate performance should match the severity of discipline. Consult your supervisor if in
doubt.

Through progressive discipline, expectations will be made clear to the subordinate and time
to correct performance is given, but continued poor performance results in progressively severe
disciplinary actions.

Disciplinary Actions

Disciplinary actions may include the following:


Verbal Reprimand
Written Reprimand
Suspension
Demotion (which may include reduction in pay)
Discharge

A Counseling Memo is another tool that a supervisor may use to instruct someone about
correct performance. Its intent is not disciplinary but rather a somewhat formal way for a supervisor
to document a performance expectation.

The Counseling/Disciplinary Action form should be used to document the above actions.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/3/03


Last revised 3/19/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance Discipline A-3.1

PIC Authority
PICs may unilaterally use the Counseling Memo and Verbal Reprimand with their
subordinates. A Written Reprimand needs Aquatic Supervisor approval. Suspension or above
requires Aquatic Supervisor, Aquatic Manager and Human Resources Officer involvement.

Unusually poor performance issues may make it necessary to have an employee immediately
taken off duty. In this instance, the Aquatic Supervisor should be contacted immediately. They have
the authority to take this action if necessary.

Documentation Distribution
Documenting discipline helps insure fairness and increases efficiency and accountability
within the Department. Many unique factors in the Department make it important to record and
distribute disciplinary actions appropriately.
The Lifeguard III should keep original Counseling/Disciplinary Action documentation in
their file. A copy of each document should be given to the employee. A copy should also be
forwarded to the Aquatic Supervisor. They will be responsible for distribution of further copies.
Written reprimands and above will be forwarded to the employees personnel file in Human
Resources.

Cause for Discipline


The Personnel Administrative Manual provides a comprehensive list of causes for discipline.
Following is a summary of key elements of that section.
Failure to abide by District Rules and Regulations
Incompetence
Inefficiency
Neglect of duty
Insubordination
Dishonesty
Willful disobedience
Inexcusable absence
Abusive treatment of others
Willful misuse of District property

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/3/03


Last revised 3/19/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance Labor Agreement A-3.2

Labor Agreement

The District has entered into a labor agreement that governs certain aspects of the seasonal
lifeguard working conditions. The Agreement is between the District and East Bay Regional Parks
Employees, Local 2428, American Federation of State, County, Municipal Employees. This section
is intended to point out key aspects of the Agreement as it relates to the lifeguards.

Scope of Coverage

Article 35 of the Agreement provides the scope of lifeguard coverage. In addition it specifies
wages, including compensation for holidays, steward representation and the grievance procedure.

Per Article 35, lifeguards are also entitled to certain provisions of Article 11.1 and 11.2.
Specifically, lifeguards have the right to grieve matters to step 3 of the grievance procedure.

Lifeguards are also entitled to provisions of Article 13.2 regarding commendatory material.
See reference # A-3.3 Commendations for more information.

Interpretation

The Aquatic Supervisor should typically be the first person consulted regarding issues related
to working conditions. They will be most familiar with the Agreement, other policies, and how the
Aquatics Department incorporates them.

The Personnel Administrative Manual covers working conditions that are not specifically
covered by the Agreement.

If the Aquatic Supervisor is not able to adequately explain an Agreement related issue, the
lifeguards union steward would typically be contacted next. In the case of a Personnel
Administrative Manual issue, the next person is typically a Human Resources Officer.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date 1/29/03


Last revised 2/22/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personnel Commendation A-3.3

Commendatory Material

Recognizing good employee performance is valuable in raising morale and creating a


positive working environment. It is also a valuable form of feedback a supervisor should regularly
use in coaching their staff and maintaining good performance. Praise and recognition can come in
many forms but is typically best delivered soon after a positive action and in a specific sincere way.
Recognizing good performance through a compliment or praise can come from anyone to anyone, it
need not be restricted to a supervisor-subordinate relationship.

On occasion employee performance merits written recognition. The Letter of Commendation


form has been developed to aid in providing this positive feedback to lifeguard staff. It will most
often be completed by a supervisory position in the Aquatics unit. If approved by an Aquatic
Supervisor (or other permanent supervisor) or above, it will meet the criteria for being placed in the
lifeguards personnel file.

Article 13.2 of the Agreement with AFSCME 2428 specifies these conditions. It reads:

Commendatory Material. Commendatory material sent to the


District regarding an employees performance by a member of the
public, a permanent supervisor or a permanent employee outside
the bargaining unit shall be placed in the employees personnel
file. Lifeguards shall also be covered by this clause.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/1/05


Last Revised: 3/1/05
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance Code of Conduct A-3.4

Code of Conduct
The ability to perform any job properly depends a great deal upon the development of a good
professional attitude. This is especially true of District employees who constantly deal with the
public. When you put on your uniform you become a conspicuous representative of the District.
Anything you do or say will greatly affect our ability to provide our service. Therefore, it is essential
that you act professionally, be mentally alert and conduct yourself in a manner that will reflect credit
upon yourself and the District. The following guidelines will assist you in performing your job
effectively and should be adhered to:
Always treat the park visitor in a courteous manner, answering questions when you can and
referring questions to someone else when you cannot. If a visitor comes to you with a
complaint, explain what you can and cannot do, and report the matter to your supervisor
promptly. More information on this can be found in LSM O-6.4 Public Feedback.
Certain information of which you may become aware is confidential and must not be
discussed outside the organization without a supervisors authorization. Confidential
information may include crime and incident reports, details of accidents, drownings, patient
information, and disciplinary actions. More information on this can be found in LSM O-6.5
Media Relations.
The use of alcoholic beverages or illegal drugs, or being under the influence of either, while
on duty, or wearing a uniform item, is expressly prohibited and will result in immediate
disciplinary action. Inform your supervisor if taking any medication that may impair your
ability to work safely or efficiently.
While on duty, do not express a personal opinion to the public on a controversial subject
regarding park operations. If an opinion is appropriate to the situation, it should be the
Districts view on the issue.
You are required to treat all co-workers, supervisors, and subordinates with courtesy and
respect. This means it is extremely important for you to report for duty at the appointed time,
take only the specified amount of time for breaks, stay alert while on duty, refrain from
having visitors and participating in non-District activities while on duty.
Lifeguard break periods shall be appointed by the PIC and taken only in authorized areas.
No one other than District lifeguards shall be allowed to sit or climb on lifeguard chairs
unless authorized by the PIC.
Safety, rescue and other District equipment is not to be moved or used by the public. Staff
should use equipment only for its intended purpose to meet District need. See reference # A-
6.3 Cell Phones for additional information regarding use of District equipment.
Lifeguards are responsible for all District equipment assigned to them including, first aid
material, equipment, keys, uniforms, etc. assigned to them. Any loss or damage to equipment
is to be reported to the PIC or Aquatic Supervisor immediately. More information on this can
be found in LSM O-4.2 Equipment Checks.
The following Department Standards acknowledgement is required from each lifeguard.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/22/06


Last Revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance Code of Conduct A-3.4

East Bay Regional Park District


Fire Department Standards
I have read the following standards and have had them explained by my
Supervisor. I understand that severe discipline up to and including termination
will be meted out for those employees culpable of the following misconduct:

1. Accepting gratuities of any sort or description.

2. Making disparaging statement or writing disparaging ethnic remarks,


whether or not intended as humor.

3. Misrepresenting or lying in instances involving official District or


Departmental business, either orally or in writing.

4. Consumption of controlled substances or being present where controlled


substances are being used, or knowingly becoming intoxicated through the
use of prescription drugs.

5. Engaging in any form of sexual harassment. This includes any unwanted


comments or contact as defined in the sexual harassment policy.

Although not specifically listed as one of the Departments priority conduct


concerns, discipline will be forthcoming to any employee engaging in retribution
against fellow employees based on political sympathy or affiliation, political
persuasion, or political choice.

The aforementioned standards of conduct for employees of the East Bay


Regional Park Distinct Fire Department do not alter or lessen any current
written policy governing the conduct of such employees.

_____________________________________ ______________________________________
Print Name Signature

_____________________________________ _____________________________________
Chief, Fire Department Date:

_____________________________________ _____________________________________
Chief, Public Safety Date:

(Department Standards Policy.LG.Frm)7/12/07

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/22/06


Last Revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance Reasonable Suspicion A-3.5

Reasonable Suspicion Guidelines


As stated in our mission, lifeguards are to strengthen the publics trust placed in us through constant
vigilance and professional, courteous, competent treatment of visitors.

Lifeguards need to be at their physical and mental best while at work. A lifeguard under the influence of
any substance that affects their ability to perform in this regard places the public and fellow employees
at unacceptable risk. Inform your supervisor if taking any medication that may impair your ability to
work safely or efficiently.

The following are excerpts from Human Resources Policy and Procedures #15 DRUG AND ALCOHOL
POLICY FOR NON SAFETY SENSITIVE EMPLOYEES. They are being provided as information, and as a
guide, for handling incidents where staff may be under the ill effects of a substance.

Seasonal lifeguards that suspect an employee may be under the influence of a substance at work should
immediately bring the matter to the attention of an Aquatic Supervisor for first level supervisor
confirmation. If an Aquatic Supervisor is not available, the Park Supervisor should be the next
alternative.

2. PROHIBITED CONDUCT.

An Employee shall not be on duty and possess, be under the influence of, or use any
Controlled Substance or Alcohol while on the job.

2C. Refusal to Submit to Required Testing.

An Employees refusal to submit to the test(s) requested by the District will be


treated the same way as an Employee who receives a positive Alcohol or
Controlled Substances Test result. Any Employee who refuses to comply
with an order for testing shall be removed from work immediately. No
Employee shall refuse to submit to a post-Accident Alcohol or Controlled
Substances Test or a Reasonable Suspicion Alcohol or Controlled Substances
Test. An employee that refuses to test and wishes to return to work must meet
the criteria as stated under 3C of this policy.

4B. Reasonable Suspicion Testing.

4B1. Test Administration. revised by memo to the following


Once an employee is reasonably suspected of being under the influence, as confirmed
by two supervisors (see 4B2 below), On-Site Health and Safety should be called to
arrange a technician to come to the job site to perform the appropriate testing. Their
phone # is 510-245-2700. This service is available 24/7.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/7/04


Last Revised: 12/9/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance Reasonable Suspicion A-3.5

4B2. Basis for Testing.

Reasonable Suspicion determinations will be made by a supervisor/manager and


verified by a supervisor/manager who is trained in accordance with 382.603 to
detect the signs and symptoms of Drug and Alcohol use and who reasonably
concludes that an Employee may be adversely affected or impaired in his/her work
performance due to the use of Alcohol and/or illegal use of Controlled Substances. If
the supervisor/manager believes that the Employee is under the influence of and/or
impaired by Alcohol and/or a Controlled Substance, the Employee will be required to
submit to an Alcohol Test and/or Controlled Substance Test at the discretion of the
District.

The District will offer the Employee the opportunity to have a bargaining unit
representative present during the interview and/or Testing process. The employee
must proceed with the testing if the representative is not available.

A Reasonable Suspicion referral for Testing will be made based on documented


objective facts and circumstances that are symptoms of the effects of Alcohol and
Controlled Substance abuse. Examples of observations, which may result in
Reasonable Suspicion may include, but are not limited to, the following:

4B2a. observable evidence of on-the-job behavior which may be related to the


abuse of Controlled Substances and/or Alcohol;

4B2b. observations of the physical signs and symptoms consistent with Controlled
Substance use, such as appearance, behavior, speech or body odors of the
Employee; and/or,

4B2c. evidence of the possession and/or use of Alcohol and/or Controlled


Substances in the workplace.

Prior to a referral for testing, a supervisor will review and confirm the observation of
the physical signs and symptoms with a manager, department head, or other
supervisor after that manager, department head, or other supervisor has personally
observed the condition of the Employee being considered for Testing. The Employee
must submit for testing within two hours of first notification.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/7/04


Last Revised: 12/9/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
(refer to H.R. Policy and Pracedore #1)

Report of Irregular Behavior


(Examples of signs and symptoms observed)
-Eyes blood shot or watery
-Odor of alcohol on breath or person
-Slurred speech
-Rapid or agitated movements
-1nabiiii to focus or slow purposeful movements
,-Unsteady balance or staggering gait

v
(Signs and symptoms 7
present not present
)
'reasonable +
Supervisor confirms

Call for First Level Manager with '


Nofurtheraction

suspicion training and


call steward I
/ Steward not available not available
Proceedwith reasonable
time frame for testing

I I I
It
Suspicion not confirmed
.c
Suspicion confirmed by First Level Manager,
No further action Administrator, or Second Supervisor

(If none available, Supervisor may ta

.
Incident reported to Manager/Supervisor, H.R., and Risk

Employeewill be advised of second test if necessary. If


first test is negative, employee will be returned to work
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance E-communication A-3.6

Electronic Communications

The following is excerpted from the Personnel Administrative Manual, APPENDIX B:


EAST BAY REGIONAL PARK DISTRICT ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS AND
INFORMATION SYSTEMS GUIDELINES

These Guidelines define the procedures for the proper use of the electronic communications
and information systems provided by the District. This includes the Districts policy on the access
and disclosure of electronic information stored, sent or received by District employees with the use
of both the voice mail and E-mail systems, the Internet and all associated electronic files systems.

All electronic files residing on District owned computers and/or other electronic storage
media are the property of the District. Therefore, employees should be aware that all records,
whether electronic or on paper, are subject to the public disclosure requirements of the Public
Records Act, subject to the exceptions provided under that Act.

The District respects the individual privacy of its employees. However, employee privacy
does not extend to the employees work related conduct or to the use of District equipment it
supplies, specifically including the networks, the Internet, voice mail and E-mail systems.

Employees should be aware that the following guidelines will affect their privacy in the work
place.

District Rights to Access Information


The networks, voice mail and E-mail systems have been installed by the District to facilitate
business communications. Although each employee has individual passwords to access these
systems, these systems belong to the District and the content of all electronic files, voice mail and E-
mail communications should be accessible at all times by the District for any business purpose.

These systems may be subject to periodic unannounced inspections, and should be treated
like any other shared file system. It is recommended that all passwords be made available to
Department Heads/Supervisors to facilitate that access.

The Information Services Department can, when requested by a Department


Head/Supervisor, override network and email passwords to provide access to files in emergency
situations.

To strengthen security, network passwords require changing every 180 days.

Though passwords must be made available to Department Heads/Supervisors, their


designees, and the Information Services Department when required, this limited availability of
passwords does not condone unauthorized access to anothers information. Access to anothers

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/6/08


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance E-communication A-3.6

computer, data and voice or E-mail messages must be limited to official business purposes.
Employees in violation of this policy are subject to disciplinary action.

All voice and E-mail messages are District records, and contain the identity of the sending
party. The contents of these messages, properly obtained for legitimate business purposes, may be
disclosed within the District, or to an authorized District representative, without your permission.
Therefore, you should not assume that voice and E-mail messages are confidential or private.

Backup copies of E-mail messages may be maintained and referenced for business and legal
reasons.

Personal Use of E-mail and Voice Mail


Because the District provides electronic mail and voice mail systems to assist you in the
performance of your job, you should use it for official business only. Incidental and occasional
personal use of these systems is permitted by the District, but these messages will be treated the
same as other messages.

The District reserves the right to access and disclose as necessary all messages sent over
these systems, without regard to content.

Messages can be accessed by the District without prior notice, therefore you should not use
these systems to transmit any messages you would not want read by a third party. For example, you
should not use these systems to transfer information of a confidential nature, i.e. private employee
information, litigation related information, or disciplinary actions.

You should not use these systems for gossip, including personal information about yourself
or others; for forwarding messages under circumstances likely to embarrass the sender; or for
emotional responses to business correspondence or work situations.

In any event, you should not use the E-mail or voice mail systems for such purposes as
soliciting or proselytizing commercial ventures; religious, political or personal causes for outside
organizations or other non-job related solicitations.

You should not send E-mail or voice mail messages on a District-wide basis to all
employees or a Forum Mailing without the express prior authorization of your Department
Head/Supervisor, AGM or General Manager. District wide E-mail and voice mail communications
are meant to inform employees of unique situations or problems which are likely to affect them, and
not for routine administrative functions.

Voice mail capacity is limited, and messages should be removed promptly. Regular system
maintenance will automatically delete earlier messages from the files after several days.

Forbidden Content of Electronic Communications


E-mail and voice mail messages which would violate existing rules, regulations and laws for
written communications are just as inappropriate in an electronic format and the sender is subject to

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/6/08


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance E-communication A-3.6

the same consequences. Examples of forbidden transmissions include sexually explicit messages,
cartoons or jokes; unwelcome propositions or love letters; ethnic or racial slurs; or any other
message that might be construed to be harassment or disparagement of others based on their sex,
race, sexual orientation, age, national origin or religious or political beliefs.

All existing District policies regarding these issues are applicable in our E-mail and voice
mail environments.

Employees are subject to disciplinary action for any transmission of inappropriate or


offensive messages.

Addition/Departure of Employees
It is the Department Head/Supervisors responsibility to inform the Information Services
Department when they want an employee added or deleted from the E-mail and network system, and
the Communications Manager for additions /deletions from the voice mail system.

In the case of departing employees, it is the Department Head/Supervisors further


responsibility to identify and relocate any remaining E-mail or voice mail messages and files they
wish to keep, by printing to hard copy or other transfer method, prior to requesting deletion. All
messages and files unidentified by such methods will be deleted along with the departed employees
access to these systems.

The addition of new employees to the network, E-mail and voice mail systems will be
accomplished by the Information Services Department or the Communications Manager following
receipt of a written request to do so, including the new employees password.

External E-Mail
To facilitate business communications outside of the organization, the District has extended
our E-mail capabilities to the Internet. Because this external communications tool is available to all
E-mail users, Internet usage guidelines are necessary to insure compliance with District policies.

All internal E-mail guidelines, including disclosure and content, are applicable to external
Internet mail communications.

While most of the Districts information is public record, District owned information that
may be subject to copyright or other distribution restrictions should not be distributed outside the
District without prior Department Head/Supervisor approval and in accordance with District policy.
Examples of such information might be Parcel Data or digital map data that we may purchase the
rights to use, but not to distribute.

Internal District documents authored by others should not be sent out on the Internet without
the prior approval of that author. This is especially applicable to Inter-Office Memorandum, which
by definition is meant to be an internal communication.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/6/08


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance E-communication A-3.6

Internet Access/Use
Access to the Internet and World Wide Web has been provided by the District to facilitate
business communications, and should be used for official business only. Only those employees
whose access to the Internet would significantly increase the effectiveness or efficiency of their
responsibilities to the District will be provided such access.

It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that this access is used in accordance with all
District policies and procedures. Violators are subject to disciplinary action. It is the responsibility of
the users supervisor to ensure that their staff is aware of and understand these policies, and to the
appropriate degree, monitor its use.

The downloading of application software from the Internet is prohibited without prior
consultation and approval of the Information Services Department, in accordance with the Desktop
Software section of this document.

Only World Wide Web sites that are of specific value to the Districts business functions
may be accessed with District supplied Internet services.

Access is specifically prohibited to Web sites whose topics would be considered disparaging
or promote messages that might be considered harassing based on sex, race, sexual orientation, age,
national origin, religion or political beliefs.

All existing District policies regarding issues of harassment are applicable in the Internet
environment, and employees are subject to disciplinary action for any receipt or transmission of any
inappropriate or offensive information.

The District reserves the right to monitor, in any manner deemed appropriate to the District,
the Web sites that are accessed by District employees using District provided equipment and/or
services, and to use that information for any legitimate business purpose within the District or by an
authorized business representative of the District without the users permission.

Network File System Guidelines


All network users have access to four network disk drives, designed for a specific purpose:

U: - The U: drive is a private directory, accessible only by the logged in user, and is defined by the
name of the user. Users can use the U: drive the same as their C: drive, and are encouraged to do so,
because the drives are physically located on the network server, and all files on the network drives
are backed up daily.

S: - The S: drive is a shared directory accessible by all users belonging to a predefined group. These
groups are generally defined by existing divisions, i.e. Parklands or Operations. Department
Heads/AGMs should determine what files are appropriate and most functional to place on this drive.

T: - The T: drive is a shared directory accessible by all users belonging to a predefined group. These
groups are generally defined by exiting departments, i.e. Human Resources, Planning. Department

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/6/08


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Performance E-communication A-3.6

Heads/Supervisors should determine what files are appropriate and most functional to place on this
drive.

P: - The P: drive is a general directory accessible by all District network users. The directory is
further divided into subdirectories representing the major divisions within the organization, i.e.
Management Services or Parklands. This drive is designed to retain common files that would be of
interest to the entire organization, such as the Administrative Manual or current fee schedule. In this
directory, only the creator of a file has the access rights to modify or delete the file. All other
network users have read-only access. Department Heads/AGMs should approve and monitor what
files are placed in the public directory for District-wide consumption.

There will be periodic review of these drives by the Information Services Department with
the appropriate authority to insure that each directory is being utilized appropriately and that
directories do not contain superfluous information.

Department Head/Supervisor Responsibilities


It is the responsibility of the Department Head/Supervisor to ensure that all those employees
in their charge read and understand these guidelines. It is their further responsibility to ensure that
those in their charge adhere to these guidelines, and take appropriate steps to correct any known
violations of these guidelines.

Desktop Software
Prior approval of the Information Services Department is required before any software is
installed on any District computer, and only District approved and licensed software may be
installed on District computers. District approved software is determined by the software standards
set forth in the IT Standards section of the IT Strategic Plan.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/6/08


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 5 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Uniforms Requirements A-4.1

Uniform Requirements

Lifeguards are required to wear the prescribed uniform while on duty. An effective uniform
identifies the trained rescuers in time of need, is a valuable public relations tool and provides
lifeguards with a degree of protection from the elements. A lifeguard dressed in a neat, clean,
functional uniform will elicit respect from public and co-workers. A lifeguards hair, grooming and
jewelry need to meet these same standards. Uniforms need to be worn consistently among
individuals. Each item is to be worn as designed with no personal modifications.

The condition of each lifeguards uniform reflects not only the individuals attitude but also
that of the Lifeguard Department and District as a whole. Because of this, staff is not to wear any
uniform items while off duty unless they are traveling directly between home and their work site.

Lifeguards
When on the clock, lifeguards are to be in the District issued uniform items as described
below. Exceptions are made during drive time, the annual check-in meeting or with prior
authorization from an Aquatic Assistant or above.

Lifeguard Service
At a minimum, staff is to wear lifeguard shorts with patch and have a stocked fanny pack on
or immediately available. In addition, women wear a one or two piece red swimsuit. See
Reference # A-4.3 Womens Swim Suits for more information.

For personal protection it is highly recommended that in addition to the above, lifeguards
wear sunblock with a Sun Protection Factor (SPF) of at least 15 on all exposed areas, hat,
T-shirt or rash guard, sunglasses with retainer, and footwear that allows for quick removal.
Sweats and jackets should be worn as conditions indicate. Lifeguard beanies may be worn
when a sweatshirt or jacket is worn.

Also highly recommended is a waterproof watch that can be used for such things as taking a
patients vital signs, tracking rotation intervals and daily events.

Swim Lessons
When teaching swim lessons, staff is to wear their lifeguard shorts with patch. A wetsuit or
rash guard may be worn for thermal and/or UV protection.

In-Water Training
Lifeguards are to wear their lifeguard shorts during inwater training. For fitness swims,
swim goggles are recommended. Each lifeguard must tow a rescue tube when swimming
outside the swimming area at open water facilities.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 10/1/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Uniforms Requirements A-4.1

Dry Land Training


While participating in dry land training at a lifeguard facility the minimum required lifeguard
service uniform items are to be worn. If training is not held at an Aquatics facility, the
womens swimsuit need not be worn.

Junior Lifeguard Instructors


Junior Lifeguard Instructors are to follow the same minimum uniform requirements as
lifeguards. However, they are to wear a Junior Lifeguard Instructor T-shirt or rash guard in place of
the Lifeguard Service T-shirt. Instructors are to wear their T-shirt or rash guard anytime they are
conducting dry land activities. This requirement is in place in order to promote and model safe sun
practices to the junior lifeguards.

Meetings and Special Programs


When teaching public or in-house, non-lifeguard personnel, or attending meetings, public
appearances, program fairs, school visits etc., acceptable attire includes a dark blue pant or short. If
issued, the Aquatics Department polo shirt is to be worn. The Departments uniform sweatshirt,
jacket, sweat pants and hat may be worn as conditions indicate. Footwear should be appropriate to
the environment.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 10/1/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Uniforms Procedures A-4.2

Uniform Procedures

Issued Uniform Items to Returning Lifeguards


At the beginning of each season, returning lifeguards submit a Uniform Request form with
their Pre-Season Work Availability form. Necessary uniform items will be issued upon rehire with
Aquatic Supervisor approval. Aquatic Supervisors may request to see the condition of previously
issued uniform items before replacement. Some uniform items are expected to last more than one
season, especially for part-time lifeguards. See Reference # A-4.3 for womens suits.

Issued Uniform Items to New Lifeguards


Upon successful completion of the first eight days of the Lifeguard Academy, cadets will be
issued the following items:

One pair red shorts with lifeguard patch


Two T-shirts (combination of short and/or long sleeve)
One pocket mask
One fanny pack
One sweat shirt
One sweat pant
One baseball style cap and/or wide brim hat

Lifeguard III and II classifications, and other appropriate staff, may also receive a
Department polo shirt.

It is each lifeguards responsibility to keep their uniform in a neat, clean, functional


condition. Fanny packs are considered a small first aid kit and are to contain a pocket mask with one
way valve and at least one pair of non-latex medical gloves. Additional first aid or personal items
may be stocked in the pack as long as they dont interfere with retrieval of the mask and gloves.

Replacement
The District will replace uniform items that are damaged or worn out during the correct
performance of job duties. Submit a memo to your Aquatic Supervisor explaining the circumstances
of the damage. Also include a description of the size and type of uniform item to be replaced.
Lifeguards will be required to reimburse the District for uniform items that are lost or ruined by
lifeguard negligence.

Additional Uniform Items


Additional uniform items may be purchased at lifeguard expense. Their use is restricted to
the same conditions as issued uniform items.

Contact your Aquatic Supervisor for current information on the cost of these items. Submit a
speed memo detailing your request and attach a check in the appropriate amount, made out to
EBRPD, to your Aquatic Supervisor.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 3/19/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Uniforms Procedures A-4.2

The uniform jacket, beanie and rash guard may be purchased according to specific
arrangements made each season. Contact your Aquatic Supervisor for more information.

The lifeguards first initial and last name may be embroidered centered on the rear bottom
portion of the baseball cap or wide brim hat in matching white thread in full block font, size.40.

Pips that designate years of service and classification may be embroidered on the baseball
cap, wide brim hat or lifeguard trunk. See reference # A-4.4 Recognition Alterations for more
information. Contact you Aquatic Supervisor with questions.

Marking Methods
As soon as possible after issue, uniform items should be labeled. Labeling should be done
with a Sharpie permanent marker, in a way that is not visible on the outside when worn. The label
should include the lifeguards first and last name whenever possible. Otherwise, first and last initial
is acceptable if space prohibits. It should be written neatly using small lettering.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 3/19/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Uniforms Womens suits A-4.3

Womens Swimsuits

Women are required to wear uniform shorts in conjunction with a one or two piece red
swimsuit. Because no single style swimsuit seems to function equally well for all, it is necessary for
female lifeguards to purchase a suit that meets both their, and District, needs.

The swimsuit must meet the following criteria:


Remain in place during performance of all lifeguard duties
Entirely red in color
Minimal logos and/or wording
No ties or clasps
Athletic/sport style
Approval of the Aquatic Supervisor

Swimsuits manufactured by, or similarly to, TYR, Speedo, Nike or Dolphin are
recommended. Suits are subject to Aquatic Supervisor approval.

Purchase and Reimbursement


Female lifeguards may be reimbursed for the purchase price of appropriate suits up to a $50
limit each season. If a lifeguard teaches swimming lessons for a minimum of two full sessions in a
season, they are entitled to a $100 reimbursement limit.

In order to receive reimbursement, a lifeguard must submit a properly completed Expense


Report and receipt to their Aquatic Supervisor. Expense reports should be submitted with time cards
in the pay period in which the expense occurred. All uniform items should be coded to 101-8320-
000-5191. Expenses 90 days or more old will be denied except under very special circumstances.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 3/3/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Uniforms Recognition Alterations A-4.4

Seasons of Service

Recognizing lifeguards seasons of service is an important aspect of acknowledging


individual achievement and promoting the Lifeguard Service in general. These guidelines outline
parameters, eligibility, and procedures for altering lifeguard uniforms to display seasons of service.
Lifeguards must be eligible and have prior authorization from an Aquatic Supervisor for this
alteration.

Parameters
Lifeguards are permitted to embroider the initial of their first name and their full last name on
all hats issued. This includes the baseball style cap, wide brim hat, and beanie. Lifeguards will also
be able to embroider seasons of service pips on hats and shorts. Pips will represent seasons of
service as a Lifeguard I, II, and III.

Eligibility
Each season worked will allow for one pip to be placed on the uniform. The highest rank
attained in the season will determine the pip color for that year. Acting for a position does not
constitute attaining that rank and should not be used for determining the color of the pip.

Procedure
The application of pips and/or embroidery of the lifeguards name to uniform items is
optional. Embroidery is at the expense of the lifeguard. The lifeguard will not be reimbursed for any
money or time spent working on the alteration. The lifeguard should take their uniform to an
embroidery shop with instructions for alteration. Lifeguards altering their uniform in ways other
than specified in this policy will have the item confiscated and be required to purchase another new
item if they wish to have it replaced.

Description of the Pips


Pips will be a 1/2 inch metallic red circle with a circumscribed cross. The crosses should be
1/8 of an inch in thickness with a height/width of about 3/8 of an inch (see diagram). The underlying
fabric should be visible in the space between the circle and cross. All pips of the same rank/color
must be grouped together and be in the order of Lifeguard I, Lifeguard II, and Lifeguard III.

Position Color of Cross in Pip


Lifeguard I White
Lifeguard II Metallic Silver
Lifeguard III Metallic Gold

Placement of Alterations

Lifeguard Name
The name of the lifeguard should be on the back of the hat. If incorporating pips then the last
letter of the last name must end 1/2 inch to the left of the mid-line. If the lifeguard name will solely

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/7/08


Last Revised: 3/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Uniforms Recognition Alterations A-4.4

be embroidered then it must be centered on the back. The lettering must be matching white thread in
full block font, size .40 or in 1/2 inch block font. The lettering should be 1/2 inch from the bottom
of the hat.

Pips
Pips may be placed on lifeguard hats and shorts. In regards to hats, the pips should be placed
on the back of the hat starting 1/2 inch to the right of mid-line. Each pip will be 1/8 inch away from
another pip. Each pip should be 1/2 inch from the bottom of the hat (see diagram).

In regards to shorts, pips must go along the right seam on the right leg, on the opposite side
of the patch. They must start 1 inch from the top of the shorts going down. They must be 1/2 inch
to the right (see diagram) of the seam. They must be 1/8 of an inch from other pips.

Each year vendor locations will be established so that lifeguards can go where templates of
the pips are on file. Vendor locations will be announced in the form of a communication board
topic. For specific questions regarding vendor locations contact your Aquatic Supervisor. The
alterations can be done elsewhere as long as it meets the alteration specifications.

Alterations Location
Currently there is a pip template on file at Tinas Awards & Embroidery in Hayward, where
alterations can be made. The address is:

Tinas Awards & Embroidery


1030 B Street
Hayward, CA 94541
(510) 886-3338

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/7/08


Last Revised: 3/5/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Employee Accidents Injury A-5.1

LIFEGUARD WORK INJURIES

HEAD LIFEGUARD PROCEDURES TO FOLLOW (Summary)

I. Workers Compensation Benefits for Seasonal Employees


a. No Job Injury Leave (full salary continuance)
b. Temporary Disability benefits
c. Medical benefits
d. Modified work possibilities

II. Medical Treatment


a. If an emergency, call 911 for medical assistance.
b. If not an emergency, send for medical treatment to:
i. Pre-designated Physician (form on file 30 days prior to injury)
ii. If no pre-designation on file, nearest Kaiser facility with an Occupational
Medicine Department (refer to wall poster or go to P:\Risk\Workers
Compensation\Kaiser Permanente)
c. If injury occurs on weekend and care cannot wait until the weekday, send to closest
emergency room. Follow-up care should be at a Kaiser Occupational Medicine
location or personal pre-designated physician.

III. Reporting
a. Provide claim form (DWC-1), this can wait if situation is an emergency.
b. Obtain information regarding the circumstances of the injury to include date, time,
location, and description of the injury. Report to appropriate Aquatic Supervisor and
Risk Management at (510) 544-2164 with these details. With this information, the
Aquatic Supervisor will fill out the Employers Report of Occupational Illness/Injury
(Form 5020) online. Send completed DWC-1 to the Aquatic Supervisor along with
any accompanying work status slip(s). Aquatic Supervisor will fax this form to
Bragg & Associates at (925) 609-9264 and forward original copies to Risk
Management.

IV. Follow Up
a. After injured employee obtains medical treatment, he/she will bring back a work
status slip. Report back to Aquatic Supervisor on work status. If less than full duty, a
determination of modified work availability will be made.
b. In the future, the injured employee should be submitting work status slips periodically
to you as they are been seen by the doctor. Please obtain and submit to the Aquatic
Supervisor who will be the point person for Risk Management.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 1/5/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Employee Accidents Injury A-5.1

EMPLOYEE INJURIES/ILLNESSES (Details)

Job Injury/Workers Compensation

It is critical that all employees follow established safe work practices to avoid injuries on the job.
However, in the event that an injury does occur, the most important thing to do is to provide
appropriate medical care. As employees, lifeguards are entitled to workers compensation benefits
as set forth by California Workers Compensation laws. As a result, there are very specific
procedures and policies to follow in handling these injuries.

Medical Attention

If the injured lifeguard needs medical attention, you can send him/her to the following:

1) Any Kaiser Permanente (Occupational Medicine Department), the Districts designated


medical facility for work-related injuries/illness. The addresses, phone numbers, and maps
for these facilities are posted at each lifeguard station as well as at the end of this section or
can be found on the P drive: P:\Risk\Workers Compensation\Kaiser Permanente. The PIC
should call ahead to the chosen Kaiser location so that authorization is given, an
appointment time can be scheduled, and wait time reduced. If it is a weekend or after-
hours, the injured employee can go to Kaisers emergency room or minor injury clinic.

2) The lifeguards personal physician provided that the physician is pre-designated 30 days
prior to the injury. As part of the new hire orientation packet, the lifeguard has the choice of
completing an Employee Personal Physician Pre-Designation Form. If one has been
completed, the PIC can contact Risk Management at (510) 544-2164 to confirm the physician
name before sending the lifeguard to the appointment.

If this option is chosen, the PIC should give the lifeguard the non-Kaiser packet which
includes the Districts Work Status Form and information regarding the Return to Work
Program. This packet can be found in one of the form boxes located at the lifeguard station.
The injured lifeguard should bring this packet to the doctor and request that the Districts
Work Status Form be filled out at the initial doctor visit and subsequent visits until he/she is
discharged from care.

3) The nearest medical facility. This option is chosen only if the injury requires emergency
care. In this case, 911 should be called and the injured worker will be taken to the nearest
medical facility.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 1/5/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Employee Accidents Injury A-5.1

Notification/Claim Forms

Every employee injury should be reported immediately to the PIC (Person in Charge). Once
notified, the PIC should ensure that necessary medical attention is sought and the appropriate
workers compensation claim forms are completed. The PIC must notify the on duty Aquatic
Supervisor by leaving a voice mail message as well as a page. Also, contact Risk Management at
(510) 544-2164. A message should be left if no one answers. All messages should provide the
injured employees name, job title, work location, injury time and date, extent of the injury, how the
injury occurred, and a brief description of how it is being dealt with.

There are two workers compensation claim forms that need to be completed:

1) Employees Claim for Workers Compensation Benefits (DWC-1): This form


must be provided by the PIC to the injured lifeguard within 24 hours of the PIC being
notified of the injury. The injured lifeguard fills out lines 1 thru 8 of the employee
section. If the employee does not want medical attention but wants to document that an
injury/accident has occurred, this form does NOT need to be completed. In this case,
proceed to the next section on how to complete the 5020.

The PIC fills out lines 9 thru 18 of the employer section as follows:

Line 9: East Bay Regional Park District


Line 10: 2950 Peralta Oaks Court, Oakland, CA 94605
Line 11: Date injury was reported to PIC
Line 12: Date claim form was provided to injured employee by PIC
(form has to be given within 24 hours of notification of the injury)
Line 13: Date injured employee returns the completed top portion of the
form to the PIC
Line 14: Bragg & Associates, P.O. Box 5372, Walnut Creek, CA 94596
Line 15: Permissibly self-insured
Line 16: Aquatic Supervisor signature
Line 17: Aquatic Supervisor job title
Line 18: Aquatic Supervisor telephone number

The original copy of the DWC-1 along with the doctors work status note should be faxed by the PIC
to the Aquatic Supervisor and Risk Management. Risk Managements fax number is (510) 639-
4754. The PIC should then forward the originals to the Aquatic Supervisor. If the forms are faxed
copies, the Aquatic Supervisor should sign on the fax copy for the purposes of faxing to Bragg as
well as on the original when it is received. The Aquatic Supervisor should immediately fax the
DWC-1 form (fax copy or original) along with any doctor work status slips to Bragg & Associates at
(925) 933-2994 using the Bragg fax notification cover sheet. This fax cover sheet can be found in the
workers compensation reference folder provided by Risk Management to the Aquatic Supervisor or
on the P drive at P:\Risk\Workers Compensation\Bragg fax notification. Once the Aquatic
Supervisor has obtained copies of all originals, they can be forwarded through interoffice mail to

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 1/5/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Employee Accidents Injury A-5.1

Risk Management Copies of each completed form should be given to the injured worker as well as
retained by the Aquatic Supervisor.

Employers Report of Occupational Injury/Illness (Form 5020): This form is to be completed


within five days of notification of the injury. The PIC needs to gather as much information about
the injury as possible including the location, time, and details of the injury, and relay it to the
Aquatic Supervisor who will prepare the 5020 online.

THIS FORM IS COMPLETED MANUALLY (NOT ONLINE) IF THE EMPLOYEE DID NOT
SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION. In this case, the Aquatic Supervisor should complete a hard copy
of the form. Bragg will not be notified and a claim will not be set up. The Aquatic Supervisor
should forward the completed form to Risk Management and the form will be held as a Record Only.
If the injured employee decides to seek medical attention at a later date, this form will be then faxed
to Bragg along with a completed DWC-1.

If the form is completed online, the Aquatic Supervisor will obtain a user name and password from
Bragg & Associates website in order to complete the 5020 online. Instructions on how to obtain a
user name/password can be found on the P drive at P:\Risk\Workers Compensation\5020 online
instructions. Once this user name and password has been established, it can be used for subsequent
reporting of future injuries/accidents. When completing the 5020 online, the following questions
should be answered as follows:

Line 1: East Bay Regional Park District


Line 1a: n/a
Line 2: 2950 Peralta Oaks Court, Oakland, CA 94605
Line 2a: (888) 327-2757
Line 3: leave blank
Line 3a: leave blank
Line 4: park, open space
Line 5: 94-342422
Line 6: check the other box, specify Special District
Line 7: indicate date of the injury
Line 8-26: injury specific information
Line 27-29: medical information only if treatment sought
Line 30-37: injured employee information
Line 37a: check seasonal
Line 37b: leave blank
Line 38: indicate all hourly rates for the employee (i.e. lifeguards are paid at
different rates depending on the assignment which can vary from
head lifeguarding to swim lessons).
Line 39: check no

After the 5020 online is completed, the Aquatic Supervisor should address an email to Risk
Management indicating whether the injury was preventable and ways that it can be prevented in the

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 1/5/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Employee Accidents Injury A-5.1

future. The Aquatic Supervisor does not need to send a copy of the 5020 to anyone since copies are
automatically forwarded if the username and password has been set up to send a copy to the
Aquatics Manager and Risk Management.

Medical Treatment Documentation

The injured lifeguard should inform the doctor that his/her injury is work-related and give the
workers compensation third party administrator billing information to the doctors office: Bragg &
Associates, P.O. Box 5372, Walnut Creek, CA 94596.

At every doctors appointment, a medical work status slip should be obtained by the injured worker.
The injured lifeguard should bring a copy of the medical documentation to the PIC. The PIC should
fax a copy of the medical work status slip to Risk Management at (510 ) 639-4754 and Aquatic
Supervisor. The original should be forwarded to the Aquatic Supervisor. The medical work status
slip should contain the following specific information:

1) The exact date and time of the doctors appointment.


2) The nature of the injury.
3) The employees work status. The work status will be one of the following:
a) Full unrestricted duty. In this case, the Aquatic Supervisor will advise the PIC so that
the employee can be placed back to his/her normal schedule.
b) Modified/restricted work. The doctor should address all work restrictions. If the
employee went to a non-Kaiser doctor, the Districts work status slip should be filled
out reflecting the restrictions. Kaiser work status slips are acceptable. If the injured
lifeguard has been placed on modified work, the Aquatic Supervisor should determine
if modified work is available and inform Risk Management. If modified work is not
available, the employee will be off work and eligible to receive temporary disability.
c) Off work. The medical note should indicate the duration of the off work status and
the next appointment date. It is very important that the Aquatic Supervisor advise the
PIC and Risk Management if the injured employee is in this particular work status.

If the work status is less than full duty, it is the responsibility of the injured worker to continually
update the Aquatic Supervisor of his/her work status after every doctor visit by providing updated
medical work status slips.

Timecard

Lifeguards are seasonal hourly employees and are not entitled to full salary continuation under Job
Injury Leave. As such, any time off due to the work injury is not recorded on the District timecard.
If the injured employee has been taken completely off work, he/she will be compensated at the
temporary disability rate according to workers compensation state law. Temporary disability
checks will be mailed directly to the injured lifeguards home address. Time off due to
appointments such as doctor visits, including the day of injury, and physical therapy are not
compensable.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 1/5/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 5 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Employee Accidents Injury A-5.1

Mileage Reimbursement

Out of pocket mileage expenses related to the injury are fully covered and reimbursement is
administered by Bragg & Associates, the Districts third party administrator for workers
compensation. Along with other important correspondence, Bragg & Associates will mail the
mileage reimbursement form directly to the injured lifeguard.

Handling Of Specific Injuries

1) Body Fluid Exposure

If a lifeguard, in the course of his/her job duties, has been exposed to a known or suspected
communicable disease, the exposure should be treated as a work-related injury. An exposure
is defined as contact with an infectious agent such as blood, body fluids or other potentially
infectious material (OPIM) through inhalation, percutaneous inoculation (exposure occurring
as a result of piercing the skin barrier, e.g. needle stick, laceration by contaminated glass or
metal), or contact with an open wound, non-intact skin or mucous membrane (e.g. eye,
mouth, nostril) that results from the performance of an employees duties. See the District
Safety Manual under Infection Control for more information.

Immediate action should include washing the infected site with warm soap and water (or
clean fresh water if in the mouth, nose or eyes) as soon as possible and reporting the injury to
your supervisor.

2) Tick Bites

Due to the slight possibility of contracting Lyme disease, employee tick bites require the
additional following attention:

A District Tick Kit is available for sending live tick specimens to the Districts IPM
Specialist for identification and testing. Instructions on the tick kit should be followed
carefully. If the tick is identified as Ixodes Pacificus, the tick will be forwarded to U.C.
Berkeley for testing. The University Board of Regents requires District employees to sign a
consent form prior to testing. The Districts IPM Specialist will provide the form and notify
the employee of the test results.

Kaiser Permanente Locations

Occupational Health Center Locations and Contact Phone Numbers

ANTIOCH Phone: (925) 779-5434


3400 Delta Fair Blvd., Adobe Building
Antioch, CA 94509-4004 Fax: (925) 779-5135

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 1/5/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 6 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Employee Accidents Injury A-5.1

FREMONT Phone: (510) 248-3015


39400 Paseo Padre Pkwy, Mission Bldg
Fremont, CA 94538-2310 Fax: (510) 248-3212

HAYWARD/UNION CITY Phone: (510) 675-4807


3555 Whipple Road
Union City, CA 94587-1507 Fax: (510) 675-3448

LIVERMORE Phone: (925) 243-4880


3000 Las Positas Road
Livermore, CA 94550-9624 Fax: (925) 243-4889

OAKLAND Phone: (510) 752-1244


235 W. MacArthur Blvd., 3rd floor
Oakland, CA 94611-5640 Fax: (510) 752-6244

MARTINEZ Phone: (925) 313-0301


200 Muir Road, Hacienda Bldg., 1st Flr
Martinez, CA 94553-4614 Fax: (925) 313-4747

PLEASANTON Phone: (925) 847-5160


7601 Stoneridge Drive, So. Bldg, Fl 1
Pleasanton, CA 94588-4501 Fax: (925) 847-5183

WALNUT CREEK (WCR) Phone: (925) 295-6466


1425 S. Main Street
Walnut Creek, CA 94596-5318 Fax: (925) 295-6775

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 1/5/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 7 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Employee Accidents Property A-5.2

Property

In the event that an on duty employee is involved in an accident that results in damage to
property (private, public or District) the on-duty Aquatic Supervisor needs to be notified as soon as
possible. If the accident involves a vehicle, the Vehicle Accident Report form needs to be completed
and submitted to the Aquatic Supervisor on the same day of the incident.

In general, follow these procedures in the event of property damage:

If anyone is injured deal with their injuries first. Notify dispatch and request
emergency personnel as needed.
Do your best to attend to the scene so that it is safe to treat those injured and
so that no one else becomes injured.
Don't leave the scene until relieved by emergency service personnel unless it
is necessary for your safety.
Notify your supervisor of the situation. Determine the owner of the damaged
property and insure they are notified of the situation as well. Provide your
name, District address and phone number to the owner of the damaged
property. Get the name, address and phone number of the property owner.
If it involves a vehicle accident, get drivers license and insurance carrier
policy numbers as well. Do not get into a discussion of who is responsible.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date:4/1/98


Last revised 3/3/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personal Equipment Authorization to Use A-6.1

Authorization to Use Personal Equipment


The Personnel Administrative Manual provides the Districts written policy for personal
equipment use.

Personal equipment falls into three categories:

1. Special equipment: The use of this type equipment for District business is to be held to
a minimum. Lifeguards are prohibited from using special types of personal equipment
without written authorization. A lifeguard should contact their Aquatic Supervisor if
they wish to receive this authorization. Written authorization will ultimately need to
be secured from the Assistant General Manager of Management Services before the
District will take responsibility for its use.

2. Required equipment: e.g., prescription glasses and hearing aids. There is no need for prior
written or verbal authorization from a supervisor to use this equipment.

3. Normally worn equipment during performance of duties: e.g. watch, sunglasses, footwear.
These items are recognized as necessary to perform the lifeguards job. Any other
items are likely to fall into the special equipment category.

Responsibility for and protection of this equipment shall be provided at the same level as for
District equipment.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/11/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personal Equipment Reimbursement A-6.2

Personal Equipment Reimbursement Procedure

Reimbursement Conditions

Reimbursement will be provided for damaged or stolen (not lost) personal property that falls
under one of the three personal equipment categories.

The Personnel Administrative manual is clear that lost personal property will not be
reimbursed by the District. Therefore, it is highly recommended that some type of retaining band be
used on sunglasses in order to minimize the chance that they become lost while performing lifeguard
duties.

The District will not reimburse employees for personal property, such as heirloom jewelry,
radios, etc.

The property needs to have been damaged or stolen while the employee was performing
District duties without contributory fault of the employee.

The District reimbursement amount will be the lower of either the purchase price or fair
market value.

Failure to follow this procedure may be grounds for denial of the claim.
The lifeguard needs to immediately notify the Aquatic Supervisor and explain the nature and
circumstances of the damage or theft. As soon as is reasonably possible the lifeguard needs to show
the Lifeguard III the damaged equipment.

For stolen or damaged property the lifeguard needs to complete a police report (Park
Operations Field Report if value is less than $400).

Within 24 hours following the occurrence, the lifeguard needs to complete and attach a
narrative that describes the extent and nature of the damage, the circumstances of the event, and the
services being provided at the time of the event. This report needs to be turned in to the Aquatic
Supervisor along with the damaged property on the day it is completed. As soon as reasonably
possible following the submission of the initial report, the lifeguard needs to submit a receipt,
statement, estimate or other verification of the purchase cost, fair market cost or the cost to repair the
item along with a completed expense report (typically coded to 101-8320-000-5111 as safety
equipment) to the Aquatic Supervisor.

Lockers
Typically each lifeguard will be assigned a locker individually or to be shared with another
lifeguard. Personal items should be kept in a locked locker. This includes uniforms issued by the
District when they are not being worn.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/11/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Personal Equipment Cell Phone Use A-6.3

Cell Phone Use

From the Districts Personnel Administrative Manual, Section 17.01.B:

2. The following actions by employees are inappropriate and in conflict with the duties and
responsibilities of employment.
e. Using or borrowing District time/on-duty hours, facilities, motor vehicles, equipment
(including but not limited to: computers, scanners, fax machines, and District telephones) or
supplies for personal use/affairs or advantage or for internal union business or police association.
This would include use of a private cell phone for personal affairs while on duty but not preclude
the use of cell phones during breaks, lunch hours, or critical emergencies.

As a result, the following are lifeguard service guidelines for personal cell phone use.

While on duty all cell phones/pagers are to be in the lifeguard station or locker room and not on
your person.

Phones should be set to take messages or store incoming pages to return at a later time.

Cell phone calls may be made when you are either on a scheduled break or when off duty.

Consult your supervisor for determining the need for personal cell phone use during critical
emergencies.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 6/10/04


Last Revised: 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Sensitivity Awareness Harassment A-7.1

Harassment
The source of this policy is the Districts Personnel Administrative Manual.
It is important for lifeguards to recognize that harassment is a form of illegal discrimination and that
the workplace has very specific, strictly followed, policies regarding acceptable interpersonal
conduct.

Policy

Harassment of the public, an applicant for employment or an employee by a District


manager, supervisor or co-worker because of race, sex, sexual orientation, age, national origin,
ancestry, religious creed, marital status, physical handicap or medical condition is unacceptable
behavior and will not be tolerated by the District.

The policy also applies to:


+ Jokes and negative comments that disparage public or co-workers based upon
race, sex, sexual orientation, age, national origin, ancestry, religious creed,
marital status, physical handicap, medical condition, etc.
+ Any type of harassment or discrimination based upon a lifeguard being new to
the District.
+ Use of E-mail, voice mail, and all written or verbal communications.

Employee Role

If you believe an incident of harassment has occurred; the following actions should be taken:
+ Identify the offensive behavior to the harasser and request that the action be stopped.
+ Report the offensive action to the Human Resources Manager. It is the employees
responsibility to bring the situation to the attention of management. This includes
employees who think they are the recipients of harassment as well as those who
believe they have witnessed another employee being harassed.

District Role

The District will take an affirmative role in protecting its employees from harassment.

Complaints of alleged harassment or discrimination will be promptly investigated under the


direction of the Human Resources Manager.

The Human Resources Manager shall function as follows:

+ Counsel the reporting and/or harassed employee and outline the options available.
+ Obtain a factual written statement of the complaint for processing to the concerned
Head of the Department.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/27/03


Last revised 2/22/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Sensitivity Awareness Harassment A-7.1

+ With the assistance of the concerned Department, investigate and recommend


appropriate disposition of the complaint.

The investigation may include interviews with the directly involved parties, and where
necessary, employees who may have observed the alleged harassment or who may be similarly
situated with the complaining employee and who may be able to testify to their experience with the
accused employee.

Harassment is serious, illegal employee misconduct and will be treated as such by the
District taking appropriate discipline.

Sexual Harassment

Sexual harassment is a specific form of harassment that is prohibited by this policy.

The employees and Districts roles and responsibilities listed above apply in these situations
as well.

The following information is provided to help employees avoid and/or recognize sexual
harassment.

Definition -- Sexual harassment is defined as deliberate or repeated behavior of a


sexual nature, which is unwelcome to someone else. It can include verbal behavior,
non-verbal behavior and/or physical behavior.

Legal Description -- Sexual harassment is a form of discrimination and is an


unlawful employment practice under Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act.
Unwelcome sexual advances, requests for sexual favors, or other verbal or physical
conduct constitute sexual harassment when any of the following occurs:

+ It is part of the decision to hire or fire.


+ It is used to make other employment decisions such as pay, promotion, or job
assignments
+ It interferes with the employees work performance.
+ It creates an intimidating, hostile, or offensive work environment.

Examples:
+ Negative or offensive comments, jokes or suggestions about another individuals
gender or sexuality
+ Obscene or lewd sexual comments, jokes, suggestions or innuendoes
+ Suggestive looks or leering
+ Pats, squeezes or repeatedly brushing against someones body
+ Displaying nude or sexual pictures, cartoons or calendars

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/27/03


Last revised 2/22/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Sensitivity Awareness Harassment A-7.1

New Lifeguard Harassment

As noted above, a lifeguards lack of seniority is not grounds for harassment nor
discriminatory treatment. Lifeguards are expected to treat everyone with respect and courtesy.
Following are some simple guidelines that, if constantly followed, would eliminate the need
to mention this issue.
Other peoples personal belongings should be left alone.
A persons name should be used when referring to them.
Job assignments are to be distributed equitably.
All scheduling and rotation guidelines apply to everyone.
Conditioning and team-building exercises should be applied to all.
Often a new lifeguard will need extra practice time to develop a technical skill; time
should be spent developing key elements of that skill.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/27/03


Last revised 2/22/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Sensitivity Awareness Disability Etiquette A-7.2

Disability Etiquette

The District uses its best efforts to respond to the outdoor recreational needs of all park
users, including those users who require special assistance, such as the elderly, disabled, and
economically disadvantaged persons.

We will strive to provide access for people with disabilities in accordance with applicable
laws and regulations for accessibility. With this is mind, there are several guiding principles that
lifeguards can follow for making reasonable accommodations.

The goal of providing accessible programs and facilities is to foster independence while
maintaining the fundamental experience of the program.

Accommodations should not jeopardize the participants safety, other park users or staffs.
Discuss with the person what accommodations they would like. Good customer service that assists
everyone to enjoy their park visit is our goal.

Become familiar with the Disability Etiquette material in the In-Service Training
Manual. Swim lesson instructors should also become familiar with the American Red Cross Water
Safety Instructor Manual, Chapter 18, Customizing for Disabilities section.

People with disabilities prefer that you focus on their abilities, not their disabilities.

Be yourself dont be afraid to make light conversation

Dont automatically give assistance; always ask first

Be aware of the possibility of hidden disabilities, not all disabilities are apparent. For
example, poor vision, seizure disorder, hearing loss, learning disabilities, etc.

Staff should generally not carry or lift a person to provide program access.

In unclear situations, a supervisor should be consulted in order to help determine what


reasonable accommodations can be made. In general, dont say no to an accommodation request
without first consulting a supervisor.

In emergencies that require evacuation, pay special attention to those that may need special
notification or accommodation in getting to a safe location.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/16/05


Last Revised: 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Sensitivity Awareness Beach Wheelchairs A-7.3

Beach Wheelchair General Use Guidelines


These guidelines are intended to provide general information regarding how park visitors may gain
use of District beach wheelchairs. Because the goal is to accommodate reasonable public requests,
each site will develop park-specific guidelines that meet this goal.

Depending on specific park procedures lifeguard will have various roles in preparing, issuing,
inspecting and/or storing the beach wheelchairs. Lifeguards should assist public with use of the
beach wheelchairs as appropriate.

Locations
A beach wheelchair is currently available for public use at Crown Beach, Don Castro, Quarry Lakes,
Shadow Cliffs and Temescal.

Public may telephone the following numbers to find out information about the chairs availability.
1-888-ebparks (327-2757) swimming information line for general information
Crown Beach 510- 521-6887 or 510-521-7090
Don Castro 510-247-2522
Quarry Lakes 510-795-4883
Shadow Cliffs 925-846-3000
Temescal 510-652-1155
TDD 510-633-0460

Use
Beach wheelchairs are intended to provide a means for wheelchair bound individuals to
travel across the beach. They require an assistant to push the chair.
Beach wheelchairs are not intended for water use.
Beach wheelchairs will be loaned on a first come, first served basis. The chair cannot be
reserved. Park staff will attempt to assist in accommodating overlapping requests for use.
Contact any park staff to have the chair brought out to the beach. The best point of contact is
at the entrance kiosk or the Crab Cove Visitor Center at Crown Beach. Anticipate that
approximately 15 minutes will be needed to prepare the chair.
Staff will discuss arrangements for returning the chair during its check-out.
Park staff does not assist individuals into, or during use of, the chairs as part of this loaner
program.
There is no charge for beach wheelchair use.
Complete the beach wheelchair check-out form as appropriate.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4-4-06


Last Revised: 4-4-06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Sensitivity Awareness Public Relations A-7.4

Public Relations
Lifeguards should always treat the public with respect and understanding. You are representing not
only yourself, other lifeguards, but also the East Bay Regional Park District. A professional attitude
will reflect everyone favorably. Questions should be answered to the best of your ability. If you
dont not know the answer do not be afraid to admit it. Inform the visitor that you will attempt to
find out the answer to their question and get back to them later. Your attitude toward visitors should
be one of a genuine desire to be helpful. Remember you are constantly being watched by a great
number of visitors and should act accordingly.

It is important to understand that the way the general public perceives you is how they see and hear
you. They watch your actions while you are performing your job and when you interact with your
supervisor, subordinates and peers. Idling, gossiping, mingling and reading while on duty are to be
expressly avoided. The public will have nothing but disrespect for you under these circumstances, to
say nothing of the disastrous consequences which may result from lack of alertness or attention to
duty.

Nothing presents a better public image than lifeguards working as a smoothly operating team.
Because we are dependent on the public for support and revenue, we must do our best to provide
them with a safe, pleasant, satisfying and rewarding park experience.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/22/06


Last Revised: 2/22/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Sensitivity Awareness JG Interactions A-7.5

Junior Lifeguard Interaction Guidelines

During the Junior Lifeguard program, facility lifeguards may only interact with the Junior
Lifeguards if does not interfere with their training schedule or with their station assignment as part
of the lifeguard rotation.

Before lifeguards can interact with the Junior Lifeguards, the Head Guard or PIC must get
approval from the Aquatic Supervisor, Aquatic Assistant, or the Programs Coordinator.

The Lifeguards are not permitted to play any games with the Junior Lifeguards. The only
interaction between the Junior Lifeguards and the Lifeguards will be to assist in teaching a
lifeguarding skill or topic, participate as a Lifeguard of the Day, or to participate in physical
training such as a run, swim or paddle.

If a JGI wants to use a Lifeguard for a Lifeguard of the Day topic then they may do so
upon approval from the Head Guard or PIC. The Lifeguard of the Day will be used as a guest
speaker for the Junior Lifeguards to talk about their lifeguarding experiences and to answer any
questions that the Junior Lifeguards may have. Information given needs to be professionally
delivered, related to lifeguarding topics and age appropriate.

The JG program can have only one Lifeguard of the Day per day and can only be used for
no more than 20 minutes. The lifeguard must only be used during their breaks and cannot be taken
out of the rotation to participate.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/25/08


Last revised 2/25/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Property Lost and Found A-8.1

Lost and Found


Property found in the District by employees or the public will be handled in accordance with
the California Civil Code Sections 2080 - 2080.3. The following policy meets this code and explains
the procedure to be followed. Many items may have little value to you, but are very valuable to their
owner; so care in handling found property is important. Follow these procedures for all items
including cash.

If the property is worth less than $20, lifeguards should make a reasonable effort to find
the owner at the time the item is picked up (usually while picking litter from the beach). If the owner
cannot be found, the item should be taken to the guard station and kept for two weeks in a secure
area where it is available if its owner comes asking about it. If someone asks for an item in this
category and they provide an accurate description, the item should be handed over to them.
Examples of these items are beach toys and some clothing and towels. If in doubt about an items
value consider the value greater than $20. If an item of this value goes unclaimed for a period of two
weeks it can be discarded.

If the value is between $20 and $100, the finder should turn the property over to the park
supervisor or their designee the same day. Procedures for handling these items may vary from park
to park. Found keys will fall into this category.

If the value is between $101 and $400 (including cash), the finder should send the item
along with a completed Park Operations Field Report, sealed in an inter-office envelope, to the
Police Property-Evidence Unit, or contact Police Dispatch to have a CSO or Police Officer take
possession of the found property. If staff is going to send the item via inter-office mail, telephone the
Property-Evidence Unit so that the unit can expect the item. Telephone (510) 544-3015.

If the finder wants to keep the found property if unclaimed, a Park Operations Field
Report (often called an R report) should be completed (see Reference #A-8.2 -- Park Operations
Field Report) Possession of the property should be transferred to the Park Supervisor following the
above procedure.

If the value of the item is more than $400 contact Dispatch and request that they send a
police officer for pick up. If an officer is unavailable before lifeguards go off duty, and the park
supervisor is not available for a face to face transfer of the item, contact the applicable Aquatic
Supervisor to advise them of the situation.

Lifeguards are not authorized to release claimed items with a value greater than $20. There is
documentation that needs to be completed by the claimant prior to this being done.

This documentation is best done by the Districts Property Clerk in the Public Safety Department.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 1/10/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Property Lost and Found A-8.1

Metal Detectors

The District allows park users (with a permit obtained from the Chief of Park Operations) to
use metal detectors in specific, designated areas as described on the permit. The permit must be
carried while metal detecting on District lands. Permitees searching beach areas must place any
metal, glass or other debris found in a park garbage can. Metal detecting in underwater sections of
the swimming areas or in the water along lake and river shorelines is prohibited.

The metal detectors should be aware that Section #485 of the Penal Code requires that all
found items of value must be turned over to the appropriate police department. These items may be
claimed by the finder from Public Safety Headquarters if, after 90 days, it has not been identified
and claimed by the legal owner. Lifeguards should refer metal detector users to the park supervisor
or a District police officer for found items being turned in.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 1/10/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Property Field Report A-8.2

Park Operations Field Report

The Park Operations Field Report is used to report the following incidents that have a loss
value of less than $400. This report is often referred to as an R report.

Incidents that qualify: petty theft, vandalism, dumping, damaged property, lost property and
found property (if the found property value is between $100 and $400).

The Field Report is a 4"x9" booklet of carbonless copy forms that have several boxes to be
filled in by the lifeguard making the report. The case number is secured by contacting Dispatch. If
not previously reported, be prepared to tell Dispatch the information requested by the Field Report
form.

Once completed the Field Report should be given to the park supervisor for their review and
processing. If the incident involves lifeguard equipment, contact the Aquatic Supervisor, advise
them of the situation and make a photocopy of the Field Report for them. In either event, record the
case number on the Lifeguard Daily Log with a short comment regarding the nature of the incident.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/22/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Property Security A-8.3

Security
Lifeguard Services relies heavily on expensive specialized equipment to deliver the
necessary level of service to those we guard. For this reason it is vital that the equipment be treated
well and that it is stored securely when not in use.

Lifeguard stations are to be locked (with a dead bolt if available) when no one is present
inside the building. If a door or its lock malfunctions, in a way that causes it to lose any of its
designed security features, it must be reported immediately to the Park Supervisor for repair. The
Aquatic Supervisor needs to be advised for information purposes.

Locks
Each lifeguard station is keyed with a Best lock in an OA series.
A common padlock used throughout the District is a Master lock coded with 0838. This padlock is
used extensively by Lifeguard Services to lock up storage cabinets, boats, board holders, etc. These
locks are available in Central Stores.

An older padlock, the 2319, is being phased, but may still be found at some facilities.

Keys
Key security is the cornerstone of the buildings security system.
The Lifeguard III, II and other necessary lifeguards will be issued keys necessary to open locks for
their assigned facility.

A combination key box, with the lifeguard station key inside, is available at most facilities.
Consult your Aquatic Supervisor for its location and combination. Do not share this code unless
authorized by your Aquatic Supervisor. Keys in this box are to be returned immediately after use.

The Lifeguard Service Key Issue form is used to issue keys to a lifeguard. The lifeguard
signs for the keys when they are issued. All issued keys are to be returned to the Aquatic Supervisor
prior to the employee leaving for the season. The Aquatic Supervisor signs the keys back in on the
Key Issue form.

Lost keys must be reported to the Aquatic Supervisor the same day they are found to be
missing.

Loaning out keys overnight is to be kept to a minimum. The lifeguard initially issued the
keys is responsible for them.

During the work day keys will need to be made available to staff in order to access the guard
station. Personally issued keys, when shared with other lifeguards for this purpose, should be
attached to a blue and white swim buoy in order to minimize the chance of losing them.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Property Security A-8.3

Requests for additional keys should be made to the Aquatic Supervisor.

Lifeguards are not authorized to duplicate keys.

Alarms
Each lifeguard station has a touch pad security alarm. All alarms notify the Districts Public
Safety Dispatch center when someone has entered the building. For more information, see Reference
#O-7.2 -- Daily Opening and Closing Procedures.

Alarm code security is important. Do not share the code with others unless authorized by the
Aquatic Supervisor.

Alarm codes are changed periodically.

If an alarm is accidentally tripped, the lifeguard should contact Dispatch, identify themselves
by name and position and advise them of the mistake. Dispatch will want assurance that the alarm
was set off accidentally and that there is no response needed.

Radios
Portable radio security is important. They are an attractive item for dishonest public to steal.
Radio inventory should be checked during the opening procedure and before closing. Do not leave
radios unattended except when absolutely necessary. For more information on handling, see
Reference #O-6.1 Radio Use.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Administration Employee Accidents Property A-5.2

Property

In the event that an on duty employee is involved in an accident that results in damage to
property (private, public or District) the on-duty Aquatic Supervisor needs to be notified as soon as
possible. If the accident involves a vehicle, the Vehicle Accident Report form needs to be completed
and submitted to the Aquatic Supervisor on the same day of the incident.

In general, follow these procedures in the event of property damage:

If anyone is injured deal with their injuries first. Notify dispatch and request
emergency personnel as needed.
Do your best to attend to the scene so that it is safe to treat those injured and
so that no one else becomes injured.
Don't leave the scene until relieved by emergency service personnel unless it
is necessary for your safety.
Notify your supervisor of the situation. Determine the owner of the damaged
property and insure they are notified of the situation as well. Provide your
name, District address and phone number to the owner of the damaged
property. Get the name, address and phone number of the property owner.
If it involves a vehicle accident, get drivers license and insurance carrier
policy numbers as well. Do not get into a discussion of who is responsible.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date:4/1/98


Last revised 3/3/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Operations
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling General Guidelines O-1.1

General Guidelines
Optimally, lifeguard staff will be used as a resource to effectively and efficiently
help meet the Districts public service goals for park visitor safety.

Lifeguards will be scheduled so as to meet current and expected visitor demands


based upon such factors as: weather, swim area size, hazards, weekends, holidays, group
reservations, programs, special events, and historic needs. The lifeguards role as an
emergency medical services provider in the Districts emergency response plan is
evaluated in scheduling and rotation determinations. There are several factors that are used
in order to determine which lifeguards are to be scheduled when hours are limited.
Lifeguards are scheduled first according to their job performance. Other personnel factors
are job title, seniority, availability and facility assignment.

Assumption of a duty assignment from another employee without authorization


from the Person in Charge or self-issuance of a duty assignment is not permitted.

The Aquatic Supervisor schedules Lifeguard IIIs. Lifeguard Is and IIs are
scheduled by the Lifeguard III with approval from the Aquatic Supervisor.

The minimum number of lifeguards necessary to open any facility is two.

Important Schedule information

Only supervising lifeguards are permitted to adjust the schedule.

Lifeguards are responsible for knowing their schedule and adhering to it.

Schedules are due to the Aquatic Supervisor at least two weeks in advance of the
schedules start date.

There are 3 primary scheduling periods during the lifeguard service season. They
are Pre Season, Peak Season and Post Season. Prior to each scheduling period lifeguards
are required to submit the appropriate work availability statement in order to facilitate
scheduling.

If the schedule is incomplete when due, it should still be turned in. Work should
continue toward filling the openings.

Scheduling resources are to be pursued as follows: 1) the facilitys designated staff


of full and part-time lifeguards, 2) other Lifeguard IIIs for information on visiting
lifeguards, 3) the Aquatic Supervisor. The Aquatic Supervisor should be contacted when all
other resources available to the supervising lifeguard have been exhausted. This contact

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling General Guidelines O-1.1

should be given as much advance notice as possible to avoid last minute difficulties. For
more information, see reference # O-1.5 Temporary Change of Assignment.

The schedule is to be posted, at least two weeks in advance, in a prominent location


on the lifeguard station bulletin board.

Any change made to a schedule already turned in, must be called in to the Aquatic
Supervisor at the time the change occurs. This is important so that the posted schedule
matches the Aquatic Supervisors.

The Lifeguard III and II should alternate their days off so that one of them is in
charge on any given day. In the event that this is not possible, another lifeguard should be
designated as Person in Charge for that day. See reference # O-1.3 for more information on
Person in Charge.

It is important to note group reservations, special events, special trainings,


meetings, deadlines/ due dates etc. on the schedule as they often affect staffing needs.

Each lifeguard is required to take at least one day off per schedule week.

Each lifeguard should be given two days off per week; one day off per week is only
appropriate if other lifeguards are unavailable.

Each scheduled shift should show a start and end time.

Lifeguards who are not scheduled for a 5 day work week may work at other
facilities but they must not accept a work assignment before confirming that their assigned
facility doesnt need them.

The following sample schedule provides a thorough, correctly done example.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Procedures O-1.2

Scheduling Procedures

The following scheduling information is to be used for scheduling. These resources


were developed based upon average historical need. However, scheduling needs to be a
dynamic process that ideally balances the number of guards in, with crowd and water
condition demands. Occasionally, poor weather or low crowd demands will make these
staffing recommendations too high. Similarly, hot weather and large crowds may make these
staffing recommendations too low. Lifeguard availability, especially pre- and post-season,
may make these numbers impossible to achieve. It is critical that the Aquatic Supervisor and
Lifeguard III work closely together toward achieving balanced schedules, not only at each
facility, but District wide. Start times are listed; the ending time will typically be 6:15.
Ending times may vary due to factors such as crowd and weather conditions. It is the
responsibility of the Person in Charge to maintain appropriate staffing levels throughout the
day.

It is the Districts intention to provide lifeguard service according to the posted


Lifeguard Service schedule. However, changing variables such as weather, water quality,
water levels, lifeguard availability and public attendance make flexibility a necessity.
Reducing the size of the swimming area (often referred to as going 1/2 lake) has proven to
be an effective way to maximize use of District resources. It is important to remember that if
there is water open for swimmers to enter, the chair responsible for that water zone is to be
staffed. There is an exception to this for Roberts pool on low attendance days. See Reference
# S-2.3 Deployment.

Scheduling Guidelines
The following Daily Scheduling Plan and Scheduling Key provide scheduling
guidelines for each facility. These tools are designed to produce effective scheduling
levels that meet District needs. If circumstances indicate that these guidelines should be
altered, then contact the appropriate Aquatic Supervisor or Aquatic Assistant immediately
for approval.

Daily Scheduling Plan

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 8
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Procedures O-1.2

The North and South Regions will each have a Daily Scheduling Plan. The Daily
Scheduling plan will vary from year to year based upon season dates, so it will not be
included here. Each day of the month will specify a scheduling plan for each facility,
which represents the authorized scheduling level for that day. Scheduling plans are
coded with letters referenced on the Scheduling Key.

Scheduling Key
The Scheduling Key provides various combinations of start times and staffing
levels. It is used to reference designated scheduling levels and start times specified on
the Daily Scheduling Plan. The Scheduling Key represents start times for lifeguard staff;
end times will vary based on factors such as weather, crowd size, and other projections.

Rotation Guidelines
For every scheduling plan, rotation options have been specified in the column
titled Rotation Option of the Rotation Guideline table. Rotation options are intended to
provide acceptable rotations based on the number of lifeguards scheduled for the day.
There are often several rotation options to choose from and the rotation may change as
lifeguards with staggered start times arrive to work. Interval options are restricted to
either 20 or 30 minutes. PICs will be responsible for implementing a rotation and an
interval option. An alternate station (alt.sta.) may apply as part of the rotation option.
For more information on alternate stations see Reference # S-1.4 Alternate Stations. For
Scheduling Plans that consist of 10 or more lifeguards see Reference # S-1.5 Minimum
Breaks.

In addition to the Rotation Guidelines, each first aid, backing, break and alternate
station should be alternated with chair stations whenever possible. When rotating on a
twenty-minute interval, it is acceptable to have two consecutive break stations. For more
information see Reference # S-1.6 Rotation.

Rotation options listed with a star (rotations that are shaded grey), in the last
column of the Rotation Guidelines table, are acceptable when water activity allows and
maintenance duties are required. These rotations are only to be used during maintenance
periods: 11:00AM to 12:00PM, and 5:00PM to closing. During these periods
maintenance duties are to be completed by break station lifeguards. These rotations
allow lifeguards to complete required maintenance while providing adequate water
coverage. It is critical that public safety needs are never compromised in the interest of
maintenance. Always error on the side of increased public safety.

Rotation Guideline Summary (Special Guidelines for > 11 lifeguards)


Adhering to the following will assure an acceptable rotation for staffing levels >11.
1. Avoid consecutive chair stations when possible
2. Rotations are either 20 or 30 minutes
3. Chair stations should be preceded by a break when possible

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 8
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Procedures O-1.2

4. Breaks can be consecutive only if the above are met and the rotation is on 20 minutes
5. No more than 3 breaks can be implemented.
6. When rotating in pairs, treat each pair as a single entity/lifeguard and follow the
correlating scheduling plan and rotation guidelines.
7. When there is only one break station in the rotation, follow LSM O-1.2 Rotation
Guidelines section.

Lifeguard III Rotation


Lifeguard IIIs have significant administrative and supervisory responsibilities on
any given day. Because of this, they may be scheduled for work outside of the normal
lifeguard service rotation.

Lifeguard IIIs may be scheduled as on-site administrators, supervisors, or roaming


PICs rather than in-service lifeguards. Their purpose in this rotation is to conduct
administrative work or oversee operational safety.

If not given in the scheduling guidelines, this is a schedule change as well as a


change in rotation and must be pre-approved by an Aquatic Supervisor.

The Lifeguard III will not be accounted for when developing the rotation for a
day, or time, in which they are strictly on-site administrators or roaming PICs. This also
affects the number of scheduled lifeguards. For example, the scheduling key calls for
Plan letter K (6 lifeguard rotation). 4 Lifeguards scheduled to start at 9:30am, 1
lifeguard scheduled to start at 12:00am, and 1 lifeguard scheduled to start at 1:00pm. The
lifeguards scheduled at these times for this key should not include the Lifeguard III since
they will not be a part of the rotation at any time. There should be 6 lifeguards scheduled
and the Lifeguard III will be the seventh scheduled for that day.

Lifeguard IIIs must contact an Aquatic Supervisor for approval on any change in
schedules regarding this or changes in the rotation.

Weekday requests will be limited to Tuesday for administrative duties. Weekend


requests will be for a roaming PIC assignment, which will solely focus on the beach
operation to ensure a safe, effective operation is in place.

Contact your Aquatic Supervisor for approval for each day not given in the
scheduling guidelines and a brief overview of the plan for the day.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 8
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Procedures O-1.2

Scheduling Key

Plan Times Plan Times Plan Times


2 @ 10:15 4 @ 9:30 7 @ 9:30
A K 1 @ 12:00 U 1 @ 12:00
1 @ 1:00 1 @ 1:00

2 @ 9:30 5 @ 9:30 8 @ 9:30


B L 1 @ 1:00 V 1 @ 1:00

3 @ 3:30 5 @ 9:30 10 @ 9:30


C M 1 @ 12:00 W

2 @ 9:30 6 @ 9:30 10 @ 9:30


D 1 @ 1:00 N X 1 @ 1:00

3 @ 9:30 5 @ 9:30 10 @ 9:30


E O 1 @ 12:00 Y 1 @ 12:00
1 @ 1:00 1 @ 1:00

3 @ 9:30 6 @ 9:30 11 @ 9:30


F 1 @ 1:00 P 1 @ 1:00 Z 1 @ 12:00
1 @ 1:00

4 @ 9:30 7 @ 9:30 Swim Test


G Q ST Station
11:00-3:00

4 @ 9:30 6 @ 9:30 Child Supe


H 1 @ 1:00 R 1 @ 12:00 CS Station
1 @ 1:00 12:00-5:00

4 @ 9:30 7 @ 9:30 HG Admin


I 1 @ 12:00 S 1 @ 1:00 AP Prep Day
Weekdays 3 hrs

5 @ 9:30 8 @ 9:30 HG Ops


J T HG Day
Weekends 5 hrs

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 8
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Procedures O-1.2

Rotation Guidelines

Scheduling Max. # Rotation Interval Rotation Description * Maintenance


Plan of LGs Option Option Only
11AM-12PM
5PM-Close
A,B 2 1 20,30 1 up, 1 on break
C,D,E 3 1 20,30 (D)11:00-1 up, 1 on break
2 20,30 (D)1:00-2 up, 1 on break
20,30 2 up, 1 on break
20,30 1 up, 1 backer, 1 on break *
F,G 4 1 20,30 (F)11:00-2 up, 1 on break
2 20,30 (F)11:00-1 up, 1 backer, 1 on break *
3 20,30 (F)1:00-2 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
4 20,30 2 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
5 20,30 3 up, 1 on break
H,I,J 5 1 20,30 (H,I)11:00-2 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
2 20,30 (I)12:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
3 20,30 (H)1:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
4 20,30 3 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
5 20,30 2 up, 1 backer, 2 on break *
K,L,M,N 6 1 20,30 (K)11:00-2 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
2 20,30 (K)11:00-3 up, 1 on break
3 20,30 (L,M)11:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
4 20,30 (L,M)11:00-2 up, 1 backer, 2 on break *
5 20,30 (K)12:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
6 20,30 (K)12:00-2 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
7 20,30 (M)12:00-3 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
8 20,30 (M)12:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1alt.sta, 1 on break
9 20,30 (M)12:00-4 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
10 20,30 (K,L)1:00-3 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
11 20,30 (K,L)1:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1alt.sta, 1 on break
12 20,30 (K,L)1:00-4 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
13 20,30 (N)3 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
14 20,30 (N)3 up, 1 backer, 1alt.sta, 1 on break
15 20,30 (N)4 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
O 7 1 20,30 11:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
2 20,30 11:00-2 up, 1 backer, 2 on break *
3 20,30 12:00-3 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
4 20,30 12:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1alt.sta, 1 on break
5 20,30 12:00-4 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
6 20,30 1:00-4 up,1 backer, 2 on break
7 20,30 1:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1 alt.sta., 2 on break

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 5 of 8
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Procedures O-1.2

P,Q 7 1 20,30 (P)11:00-3 up, 1 backer, 2 on break


2 20,30 (P)11:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1alt.sta, 1 on break
3 20,30 (P)11:00-4 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
4 20,30 (P)1:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1 alt.sta., 2 on break
5 20,30 (P)1:00-4 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
6 20,30 (Q)3 up, 1 backer, 1 alt.sta., 2 on break
7 20,30 (Q)4 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
R,S,T 8 1 20,30 (R)11:00-3 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
2 20,30 (R)11:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1alt.sta, 1 on break
3 20,30 (R)11:00-4 up, 1 backer, 1 on break
4 20,30 (S)11:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1 alt.sta., 2 on break
5 20,30 (S)11:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1 alt.sta., 2 on break
6 20,30 (R)12:00-3 up, 1 backer, 1 alt.sta., 2 on break
7 20,30 (R)12:00-4 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
8 20,30 (R,S)1:00-4 up,1 backer, 1 alt.sta., 2 on break
9 20,30 (R,S)1:00-5 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
10 20,30 (T)4 up,1 backer, 1 alt.sta., 2 on break
11 20,30 (T)5 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
U,V 9 1 20,30 (U)11:00-4 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
2 20,30 (U)12:00-5 up, 1 backer, 2 on break
3 20,30 (U,V)1:00- 5 up, 1 backer, 1 alt. sta., 2 on break
4 20,30 (U,V)1:00-(4 pairs) 2 pairs up, 1 pair backing (1 lg.
backs, 1 alt. sta.), 1 pair on break, 1 roaming PIC
W 10 1 20,30 (5 pairs) 3 pairs up, 1 pair backing
(1 lg. backs, 1 alt.sta.), 1 pair on break
2 20,30 5 up, 1 backer, 2 alt.sta, 2 on break
3 20,30 6 up, 1 backer, 1 alt.sta., 2 on break
X 11 1 20,30 -See Rotation Guideline Summary, Page 2 of 8-
Y 12 1 20,30 -See Rotation Guideline Summary, Page 2 of 8-
Z 13 1 20,30 -See Rotation Guideline Summary, Page 2 of 8-

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 6 of 8
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Procedures O-1.2

Guidelines to Develop Peak Season Schedules


These guidelines should be followed, in conjunction with good judgment, in order to
consistently allocate work schedules among lifeguard staff across the District.

If your Aquatic Supervisor provides a scheduling template that indicates weekly start and
end times with blanks for names, allow lifeguards to pick their weekly schedule in order of
performance and then seniority. Fill the lifeguards name in on the schedule theyve picked.

If provided just the Daily Scheduling plan, refer to it in order to determine the number of
lifeguards to schedule and their start times for a specific day. Incorporate this information into the
following process:

Steps
1. Put Peak Season Work Availability sheets in order of performance, and then seniority, for
full-time lifeguards on your staff.
2. Take a blank schedule and write staff names on the schedule in arranged order below the LG
III and II.
3. Schedule the LG III and II so that both work on Wednesday and at least one is working each
day.
Ideally, both start at the earliest time (9:30 am) and end at latest time (6:15 pm)
4. Go through preference sheets and cross off, with a large x, days that each lifeguard cannot
work.
5. JG instructors will be scheduled according to course enrollment and need as determined by
the North Aquatic Supervisor. JG instructors who are not teaching a session will be
incorporated into a facility schedule as efficiently and fairly as possible.
6. Start with the first full time LG I, mark two days off on each schedule template, with 1 slash,
based on their preferred days off. (Consecutive days if possible, unless preferred otherwise).
7. Write end times on every day that the lifeguard will work. Attempt to schedule the guard for
as many days as possible with at least two days off.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with the rest of the full time lifeguards in the sorted order. Use the
following guidelines:
Schedule only the amount required for each day (see LSM O-1.2)
If a guard cannot work a day, try to schedule their other day off to keep it consecutive
(Dont change anyones schedule to accommodate this).
Leave blanks when lifeguards are not scheduled due to enough staff already working on a
day and it is not one of their scheduled days off
9. Go back to the first full time LGI and go down the list and write down the number of days
each person works. Determine if anyone has a difference of 2 or more days compared to the
person above them in seniority (IE. 5, 3). If so, attempt to balance them (IE. 4,4).
10. Make any adjustments necessary to fill openings without working lifeguards more than 5
days.
11. Start with first full time LG I, enter a 9:30 start time on one of their days.
12. Continue down the list and enter 9:30 start times to each person on one day.
13. Continue this process until all openings are filled in and then continue this process with later
start times in the same manner as above.
14. Fill in any openings in the schedule with part-time guards.
15. Now look at the schedule and make sure everything looks logical and that minors are not

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 7 of 8
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Procedures O-1.2

working more than 8 hours in a day.


16. You now have 2 master weekly schedules. Make 6 JG week schedules and 4 non-JG (one
for each week of Peak-Season).
17. Fill in the dates and add holidays, group visits, training classes, meetings, Jr. Guard dates,
special events, etc.
18. Insure staff will not exceed 900 hours prior to July 1.
19. The rest of the openings must be filled in on a weekly basis using the following order:
Full-time, on staff, lifeguards working less than 5 days a week
Full-time, on staff, lifeguards willing to work more than 5 days (6 days max unless
approved by an Aquatic Supervisor)
Visiting full time lifeguards, voluntary transfers
Part-time lifeguards, voluntary transfers
Directed transfers with Aquatic Supervisor approval
20. Make 2 photocopies of the Peak-Season schedule; one for posting in the Lifeguard Station
and one for your Aquatic Supervisor
21. Keep the original for yourself

The following should be entered on schedules when appropriate


Large (X) = not available to work
One (/) = regular day off (should only be two days per person)
Empty box = available to work but not scheduled
$ = scheduled hours go into overtime

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/9/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 8 of 8
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Person In Charge O-1.3

Person in Charge
In order to meet chain of command objectives, a Person in Charge (PIC) will be designated at all
times, at each facility. Supervisory responsibility and authority for daily lifeguard operations rests with
the PIC.

The Lifeguard III or II will be scheduled whenever possible and act as the PIC. This requires that
the Lifeguard III and II alternate scheduled days off.

In the absence of the Lifeguard III and II (i.e. Supervisor staff meetings), a Lifeguard I will be the
PIC. The Lifeguard III will designate the PIC with approval from the Aquatic Supervisor. If a suitable
candidate is not available at a given facility, then a visiting PIC (preferably a Lifeguard II) should be
recruited from another facility.

The designation of a Lifeguard I as PIC will be done by circling the PICs shift on the schedule
and by making a notation on the dry erase board with the days rotation. The Lifeguard III or II should
brief the PIC, prior to their assignment, on operational expectations for that day.

As a Lifeguard I works under the PIC designation, they will be paid at the current Lifeguard II
step A rate for their hours doing duties of the higher classification. (See Reference # A-1.8 Secondary
Assignments for more information and # A-1.2 Time Cards for more information on filling out a time
card for these hours.)

Vacant Lifeguard III and II positions will be filled according to the appropriate selection process
in order to meet chain of command objectives.

Lifeguards are eligible for promotion to a higher classification when the following criteria are
met:
They meet the minimum qualifications for that position.
There is no Lifeguard III or II assigned to the facility for at least two
continuous weeks (12 days of beach operation).
The interested lifeguard advises the Aquatic Supervisor of their interest and how
the promotion requirements are met.
Candidates will then be considered for promotion.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/8/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Time Off O-1.4

Requesting Time Off/Changes


Lifeguards wishing to make a change in their regular work schedule should do so in writing
to their Lifeguard III on the Request for Change of Assignment form. This request should be
submitted at least one week in advance (earlier if possible) of the requested time off. The District
recognizes the benefits to employee moral and productivity that time off provides, however, the
Lifeguard III can only grant time off requests after the staffing needs of the facility are covered. The
Lifeguard III may assist the lifeguard in finding a replacement but it is the lifeguards responsibility
to cover their shifts. Shift trades are subject to the approval of the Lifeguard III (or PIC if necessary).
Time off requests over one week in length, over holidays or directed transfers need Aquatic
Supervisor approval.

Request of Change of Assignment Form


The Request of Change of Assignment form is used to document authorized schedule
changes. It should be used whenever possible to help avoid scheduling mix-ups. It is especially
important for documenting Aquatic Supervisor approval of directed transfers (See Reference # O-1.5
Change of Assignment for more information). Completion instructions are provided on the form.

Tardiness
Each lifeguard is required to start work at the time assigned on the posted schedule.
Tardiness is a poor work practice, causes undue strain on the work load of others, and can potentially
effect the safety of the public. If a lifeguard is going to be late, they need to make every effort to
notify the Person In Charge. Ideally this is done by calling the Lifeguard Station and speaking with
them. If staff isnt there, leave a message stating the problem and when you expect to arrive. If there
is a problem with leaving a message, contact Dispatch for assistance in relaying the message. The
Aquatic Supervisor must be contacted if your tardiness effects lifeguard service opening time or safe
staffing levels

Person in Charge
If you are the Person in Charge, and are going to be late, you need to designate another
Person in Charge and advise them of what needs to be done. You also need to advise your Aquatic
Supervisor via their telephone extension, that you will be late. If you have the only set of keys for
opening, some arrangement must be made to start the opening procedures. The Aquatic Supervisor,
Park Supervisor or Aquatic Manager are potential options to help, each carries a telephone pager and
keys. Remember, Dispatch can help in making these contacts.

Illness
If a lifeguard becomes ill while on duty, the Person in Charge must be notified immediately.
It is important to be completely alert and fit while lifeguarding. If illness will cause a lifeguard to
miss work, they need to notify the Person in Charge as soon as possible so that a substitute can be
found. If a lifeguard is unable to reach the Person in Charge, they should contact the Aquatic
Supervisor via pager.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/11/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Procedures O-1.4

East Bay Regional Park District


Lifeguard Service
Request for Change of Assignment
Regularly scheduled lifeguard: _____________________ Today's date: ____________

Lifeguard filling in: ____________________________ Facility: ________________

Dates and times of requested change: ________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

LG III must check one: ____ Approved ____ Disapproved

LG III Signature: ________________________________ Date: ________________

Directions:
To be filled out by lifeguard requesting day off
Turned into LG III at least one week in advance
Replacement guard should come from that facility whenever possible
If using a guard from another facility, the change must also be approved by the visiting
lifeguards LG III
Visiting lifeguard will not receive overtime nor reimbursement for mileage unless change of
assignment is directed by Aquatic Supervisor
LG III will approve/disapprove change (PIC if short notice)
Form will be signed by LG III and turned into Aquatic Supervisor with weekly paper work
Changes should be noted by LG III on facility schedule (use red pen)
LG III will notify Aquatic Supervisor immediately, via voice mail, of any schedule changes

Lifeguard Signature: ________________________________ Date: _______________

*Aquatic Supervisor Approval Required if Applicable:

Directed Transfer: ________________________________ Date: _______________


Approved By

Overtime: ________________________________________ Date: ________________


Approved By

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Change of Assignment O-1.5

Change of Assignment

Facility staff assignments for the season are made during the hiring and selection process.
They may also be made, or changed, during the season, as staffing needs indicate.

There are two different types of short-term facility changes in assignment; voluntary and
directed.

Voluntary Change of Assignment

Visiting another facility can benefit both the District and lifeguards by promoting well-
rounded, experienced personnel. It may also help prevent job burnout. Because these benefits can
outweigh the drawbacks of having a visiting lifeguard, voluntary changes in assignment are allowed
if requested and approved by both effected PICs and Aquatic Supervisor. The change needs to be
noted on the effected facility schedules, along with a schedule change notification to the Aquatic
Supervisor clearly stating that it is a voluntary change of assignment.

Lifeguards doing voluntary change of assignments will not be paid for travel time or mileage.
However, if going directly from one facility to another they do not need to clock out. Their sign in
time at the new facility should be the sign out time from their old facility. A comment about this
should be made on the Sign In/Out log. For more information see Reference # A-1.5 Mileage
reimbursement.

Directed Temporary Change of Assignment

Due to variable Lifeguard Service needs, directed temporary changes of assignment may be
necessary. It is important to anticipate staffing shortages and attempt to resolve them as early as
possible. Directed temporary changes of assignment should be kept to a minimum in order to reduce
the unproductive costs they incur in areas such as mileage reimbursement, travel time, pollution and
traffic congestion.

When a directed temporary change of assignment is needed, the following procedure applies:
1. Find a visiting lifeguard from the closest facility possible. Initiate the Request for Change of
Assignment form.
2. Contact the Aquatic Supervisor to advise them why a change of assignment is needed and to
get their approval.
3. Have the PIC requesting the change confirm with the visiting lifeguard their new scheduled
location and hours.
4. Once confirmed, the PIC must write the visiting lifeguard in on the posted schedule.
5. The schedule change needs to be called into the Aquatic Supervisor immediately, clearly
stating that this is a directed transfer.
6. If the visiting lifeguard was previously scheduled at another facility, both the effected PICs
need to approve the change.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/18/04
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Change of Assignment O-1.5

Travel time will be paid on the requesting facilitys budget. For more information on
calculating mileage and travel time, see Reference # A-1.5 Mileage Reimbursement.
When released from a directed temporary change of assignment, where a lifeguard is
expected to return to a regular assignment, they must report directly to the facility without delay. If
time and/or conditions allow (as determined by the PIC at the effected facility) a lifeguard may take
a voluntary unpaid break before reporting. This includes stopping for lunch or taking care of
personal errands.

Person in Charge

Anytime a visiting lifeguard is scheduled, you need to insure that they are oriented to the
important aspects of lifeguarding that are specific to your facility (i.e. zones, rotation, hazards,
facility layout, rules and regulations, radio communications, etc.). This should be done in addition to
the daily briefing.

When the visiting lifeguard leaves your facility they need to take a completed Visiting
Lifeguard Hours Confirmation form and Request for Change of Assignment form with them. These
forms are used to verify training, hours worked and directed transfer authorization for the visiting
lifeguard. Lifeguards that have visited a facility during a pay period should attach their form(s) to
their time card when they submit it for approval to their Head Lifeguard. The Head Lifeguard should
submit these forms to the Aquatic Supervisor with their staffs time cards.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/18/04
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Inclement Weather O-1.6

Inclement Weather
Daily during Spring Break, Monday through Friday during pre-season, and whenever
weather conditions make lifeguarding questionable, lifeguards should follow the following
procedure:

Beginning at 8:30 a.m. on the morning scheduled for work, call the Aquatic Supervisor in the
zone you are working. There will be a recorded outgoing message detailing any adjustments
to the facility schedules for the day. Follow the instructions on the message. If there is no
mention of a schedule change, lifeguards should report to work as previously scheduled.

Lifeguards reporting to work contrary to the recorded instructions will not be paid for their
time.

The Aquatic Supervisor will contact the office of the appropriate Park Supervisor to advise
them of any changes in the lifeguard service.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 4/15/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Service Hour Changes O-1.7

Extension and Reduction of Lifeguard Service Hours


Extension and reduction of lifeguard service hours (times other than the normal, posted
Lifeguard Service schedule) is a discretionary call that is made by the Aquatic Supervisor in
consultation with the Park Supervisor. Input from the on-site Person in Charge is critical.

As much as possible, the discussion with a Park Supervisor to extend lifeguard service hours
for that evening should begin by 4 PM.

Any District employee or member of the public can initiate the consideration process when
they recognize conditions that may warrant it. Try to plan ahead. If a warming trend is developing,
anticipate the desire of public to swim early and schedule guards as appropriate. If its a gated
swimming area, talk to the Park Supervisor about scheduling a gate attendant in to open the swim
area early.

The Person in Charge should contact the Aquatic Supervisor (when reasonable requests come
in) to advise them of the need for a possible change in service hours. Whenever the Person in Charge
recognizes a possible need to open early he/she should take steps to do so while the Aquatic
Supervisor is being contacted.

The Reservations unit should be consulted if staff is considering closing early. Reservations
can help determine whether any groups are scheduled that lifeguards dont know about.

When making the decision whether to alter the posted Lifeguard Service Schedule, the
following will be relevant factors:
Errors will be made on the side of safety
The main theme of the Districts mission is public service and public safety
What lifeguards can stay? What is their fatigue level? Experience?
How many people are in the water/on the beach? When did they arrive? Are they
likely to swim?
What is the crowd like? Age, swimming ability, locations, and presence of adult
supervision
What is the weather/temperature?
Has Ranger or Police staff requested an extension? Are there reasons they dont want
lifeguards to stay?
Is alcohol consumption apparent/likely? Is there a drop off? Groups?
How will the decision effect public relations?
Did the existing public pay a fee to swim?
What are the historical needs and practices?

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Service Hour Changes O-1.7

If the decision is made to open early or close late, the following steps may be taken to
minimize the impact on staff:
Anticipate the extension and stagger start and end times on the schedule.
Advise the lifeguards and park staff of the possible extension as soon as possible so
they can make arrangements to stay as necessary.
During early hours some lifeguards may be relieved from training assignments to
open early while the remainder of staff completes the training.
During late hours some staff may end their day as scheduled while an appropriate
number stays to provide continued service.
Consider calling in previously unscheduled staff.
When the reduction of service hours will close the swim area for the day with all
lifeguards going home, prior to doing so, notify the parking/swim kiosk and Park
Supervisor or Park Ranger in Charge so they can plan for the closure.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Scheduling Special Events O-1.8

Special Events
Special events, such as open water swims and triathlons, are often staffed by using visiting
guards whove received a voluntary or directed temporary change in assignment.

The Aquatic Supervisor will advise the appropriate Lifeguard III of scheduling needs for
special events as far in advance as possible.

When the Lifeguard III schedules visiting lifeguards it is important to follow the procedure
for making a directed temporary change of assignments where applicable.

Whenever possible visiting guards will be released so that they arrive at their regular
assignment prior to the start of scheduled lifeguard service. When a delay occurs, the visiting
lifeguard at the special event is responsible for notifying the Aquatic Supervisor on site at the special
event. The Aquatic Supervisor will contact the appropriate PIC and will release the effected
lifeguards as soon as possible.

Once released from a special event, visiting lifeguards are responsible for reporting directly
to their next assignment without delay. If time allows (as determined by the Person in Charge at the
effected facility), they may take a voluntary unpaid break before arrival (For more information see
Reference #O-1.5 -- Change of Assignment).

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Record Keeping Forms and Reports O-2.1

Forms and Reports

Record keeping is an important aspect of any professional lifeguard service. Neat, accurate,
and complete documentation serves as the official record of the Lifeguard Services activities. It is
sometimes used to determine accountability and often protects the lifeguard who has done their job.
Lifeguard Service records also represent legal documents that may be publicly inspected or used in
legal proceedings. Documentation may also help justify continued funding and facilitate planning or
policy decisions that effect staffing levels or equipment purchases.

Lifeguards at every level are required to fill out documents. Documents should never be
falsified.

Person in Charge

The Person in Charge is responsible for turning in all of their facilitys documentation accurately and
completely when it is due. Documentation is to be completed on the same day that incidents occur
whenever possible. All documentation must be reviewed and initialed by the Person in Charge
before being sent to the Aquatic Supervisor. Daily statistics should be entered on the
excel database located on the shared network drive at the end of each day.

Following is a list of the forms and reports of the Lifeguard Service and how
they are used.

The following forms are submitted to the Aquatic Supervisor every other week,
typically by delivery at a Head Guard meeting:

Daily Log -- This log is initiated on the Saturday morning that begins each week. It is available as an
Adobe form on the shared drive and contains the overall record of lifeguard operations at a
facility. It records information such as weather, water temperature, service start and end
times, rescues, preventive actions, medical aids, boat rescues, resuscitations, ambulance
transports, missing persons, guard hours and remarks on important activities of the service
for that day. See O-2.3 Statistical Definitions for more information and sample of the
completed log.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/17/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Record Keeping Forms and Reports O-2.1

At the end of each day, the Person in Charge reviews the Log for accuracy, totals the
statistics and makes concluding remarks for the day. They then enter this information into the
database. At the end of each week, the Person in Charge totals the statistics and makes
concluding remarks for the week. When completed, the original goes to the Aquatic
Supervisor.

Daily Sign In/Out Log -- Is used to verify lifeguard work hours. Lifeguards are responsible for
legibly printing their own name at the beginning of each week. They then record their time of
arrival to work. Similarly, they write down the time they leave at the end of each day and
then initial in the box for that day. A separate line is if a lifeguard signs in and out more than
once in a day. A separate log is used for program hours and special events such as junior
lifeguards, swim lessons or triathlons.

At the end of each day, the Person in Charge reviews the Log for accuracy, totals the
statistics and makes concluding remarks for the day. At the end of each week, the Person in
Charge totals the statistics and makes concluding remarks for the week. When completed, the
yellow copy is kept at the park site and the white original goes to the Aquatic Supervisor.

Daily Equipment Log -- This log is initiated on the Saturday morning that begins each week. It is
used to document that the morning equipment checks have been completed. It is done each
morning before lifeguards go in service. Boxes are initialed by the lifeguard who completes
the equipment check. The initials indicate that each item is completely stocked (according to
its inventory), functional and ready for service. For more information, see Reference# O-4.3
-- Equipment Checks. Equipment problems should be noted in the comments section. Any
equipment not ready for service should be reported immediately through the chain of
command to the Aquatic Supervisor. For more information see Reference #O-4.2 -- Red Tag
Procedure

Daily Closing Log --This log is initiated at closing on the Saturday that begins each week. It is a one
sided form that is used at the swim-at-own-risk facilities to document that the proper closing
procedure has been followed. For more information see Reference #O-7.2 -- Opening and
Closing Procedures. The person completing the closing announcement verifies that the
correct closing procedure was followed by initialing each day it was done.

Training Log -- This log is initiated on the Saturday morning that begins each week. It is a one
sided form that is used to document daily training attendance, time, and the topics covered.
Information from this form is entered into a database each day.

First Aid Walk-in -- This log is initiated on the Saturday morning that begins each week. It is a one
sided form that is used to document minor first aid treatment. It is kept at the first aid station
and is filled out each time an individual receives first aid for a minor injury. An injury logged
on this form indicates that the patient was treated and released at the treating lifeguards
discretion.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/17/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Record Keeping Forms and Reports O-2.1

Lifeguard Work Schedule -- The schedule covers a one-week period. It is to be completed prior to
the beginning of each scheduling period pre, peak and post seasons. For more information
and a sample schedule, see Reference #O-1.1 -- General Scheduling Guidelines.

Swim Group Log --This form is used to record group visits, safety lectures and any relevant
remarks related to group visits.

Medical Response Pack Lock Log This form is used to record that the Medical Response Pack
and associated bags, have been restocked after training or an incident and that the weekly
inspection was completed.

Patrol Boat Inspection Log This form is used to record inspection and serviceability of the patrol
boat. It is turned in monthly to the Aquatic Supervisor.

Incident Documentation
The following documentation is done as needed per incident and sent in with the rest of the
weeks paperwork:

Employees Claim for Workers Compensation Benefits (DWC-1) form and Employers
Report of Occupational Injury or Illness (Form 5020) form -- These forms are used to
document employee accidents or injuries. For more information see Reference #A-5.1 --
Employee Accidents.

End of Season Report --This report is used by the Lifeguard III to comment on the completed
lifeguard service season. It is given to the Aquatic Supervisor before the Lifeguard III leaves
for the season.

Rescue Report -- This report is used to report the nature and details of rescues. One rescue report
should be used for each victim of a rescue (including multiple victim rescues). On the reverse
side of this form is a decision tree to assist lifeguards in determining whether the victim is to
be released or should receive medical care.

Inspection Report -- This report is used primarily by Aquatic Supervisors (but may be used by
supervising lifeguards) to evaluate and record the status of lifeguard service operations at
various facilities and times.

Medical Incident Report -- This report is used to document patient condition and treatment
administered to all but the most minor first aids. A Medical Incident Report is a multiple part
form that is done on each patient. Each incident receives a Fire Incident number from
Dispatch that needs to be recorded on each Medical Incident Report. Once complete the
yellow copy is sent to the Park Supervisor, with the remaining copies going to the Aquatic
Supervisor for review. The Fire Incident number should be recorded on the EMS Case # line
of the Daily Log on the day of the incident.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/17/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Record Keeping Forms and Reports O-2.1

Missing Person/Parent Procedure -- This form is a two-sided document used as a work sheet for
missing person incidents. It is used each time lifeguards help in locating missing people. The
front side of the form has descriptive details of the missing person and the backside has a
checklist for conducting the missing person search and initiating incident command.
Information from this form is recorded in a database by lifeguards.

Dermatitis Notification Form -- This form is used for anyone reporting a skin irritation or
swimmers itch type condition that they feel came from the facility. A lifeguard receiving
such a report should route it through their chain of command while making sure to advise
their Aquatic Supervisor, Water Management, and Park Supervisor by telephone on the day
of the report.

Underwater Hazard Inspection Report --This report is completed prior to opening (or as soon as
possible following the start of the season) at facilities that have un-chlorinated water. It
should be done at every facility whenever factors may indicate that unsafe underwater
conditions exist. As with any identified hazardous condition, lifeguards should correct the
problem if possible, or prohibit access to the area until it is corrected. Report any uncorrected
hazardous conditions through the Lifeguard Service chain of command without delay and
include the Park Supervisor.

Vehicle Accident Report --This report is completed whenever a lifeguard is involved in an incident
where vehicles or property is damaged. It can be found in the glove box of any vehicle. For
more information see Reference #A-5.2 -- Employee Accidents/Property for more
information.

Visiting Lifeguard Hours Confirmation -- This form is used to verify hours worked and training
completed by a lifeguard who worked away from their assigned facility. It is the
responsibility of the visiting lifeguard to initiate the form for the Person in Charge. Once
completed, the visiting lifeguard is responsible for taking this form to their Lifeguard III
when they return to their regular facility.

Request for Change of Assignment This form is used to verify a schedule change has received
appropriate authorization, especially for directed transfers. It is the responsibility of the
visiting lifeguard to return this form to their Lifeguard III when they return to their regular
facility. See Reference #O-1.5 Change of Assignment for more information.

Counseling/Disciplinary Action Form This form is used to document a supervisors counseling or


disciplinary actions involving a subordinate. It should be routed and filed as indicated on the
form.

Lifejacket Loaner Form This form is used to document the loaning out of lifejackets.

Database Fields on Shared Network Drive

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/17/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Record Keeping Forms and Reports O-2.1

Ttl hrs open this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total hours open for
regular lifeguard service that day. Typical service would be 11am 6 pm and so the data
entered would be 7

Grd hrs this information is taken from the Daily Lifeguard Sign In/Out Log and represents the
total of lifeguard hours dedicated to non-program activities at a facility for that day.

JG grd hrs this information is taken from the Daily Lifeguard Sign In/Out Log and represents the
total of lifeguard hours dedicated to the junior lifeguard program at the facility for that day.

Lesn grd hrs - this information is taken from the Daily Lifeguard Sign In/Out Log and represents
the total of lifeguard hours dedicated to swim lessons at the facility for that day.

Attend this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total attendance for the
day. For more information on calculating attendance see Reference # O-2.3 Statistical
Definitions.

Groups this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the number of groups that
came for the day.

Grp attnd - this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total group attendance
for the day; adding adults and children.

Safety Lec this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the number of groups that
received a safety lecture, ie. Swim group safety talk.

Lec attnd this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total attendance of those
that attended a safety lecture for the day.

Spec. event this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the number of special
events for the day. For more information on defining special events see Reference # O-2.3
Statistical Definitions.

Prevents - this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total number of
preventive actions that lifeguards took for the day. For more information on defining
preventive actions see Reference # O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

Rescues - this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total number of non-
special event rescues that lifeguards made for the day. For more information on defining rescues
see Reference # O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

Sp Ev Rsp - this information is taken from the special event rescue log and represents the total
number of special event rescues that lifeguards made for the day. The Aquatics special event
liaison (shore person) collects this data. For more information on defining rescues see Reference
# O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/17/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 5 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Record Keeping Forms and Reports O-2.1

Comb RSQ this information is the sum of regular and special event rescues for the day. It is an
auto-fill category in the database that requires no input by staff.

Miss Per - this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total number of missing
persons that lifeguards assisted with for the day. For more information on defining missing
persons see Reference # O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

Pttrn Dvs - this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total number of pattern
dive incidents that lifeguards responded to for the day. For more information on defining pattern
dives see Reference # O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

Boat RSQ this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total number of boat
rescues lifeguards made for the day. For more information on defining boat rescues see
Reference # O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

Boat Val - this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total value of boats
rescued by lifeguards for the day. For more information on defining boat rescues see Reference #
O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

1st Aids - this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total number of non-MIR
first aid assistance that lifeguards provided for the day (these are typically first aid walk ins.
For more information on defining first aids see Reference # O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

MIR #s - this information is taken from the Daily Log and represents the total number of first aid
responses that required a medical incident report be filled out. For more information on defining
medical incident reports see Reference # O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

Combo FA - this information is the sum of 1st Aids and MIR #s for the day. It is an auto-fill
category in the database that requires no input by staff.

Amb trans - this information is the total number of ambulance transports for the day. For more
information on defining medical incident reports see Reference # O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

Drwn-grd this information is the total number of guarded drowning deaths for the day. For more
information on defining guarded drowning see Reference # O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

Drwn-ungrd - this information is the total number of unguarded drowning deaths for the day. For
more information on defining unguarded drowning see Reference # O-2.3 Statistical Definitions.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/17/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 6 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Record Keeping Facility Diagram O-2.2

Facility Diagram

The facility diagram is to be posted in the lifeugard station. It is to be kept up to date daily
with a close representation of the swim area rope boundaries, lifeguard chairs, observation zones,
firs aid station, and underwater hazards. It is referred to as needed during the daily lifeguard briefing
and orientation to new or visiting lifeguards. Its primary purpose is to help explain the facility layout
and lifeguard zone responsibilities. It can be a useful tool for preventive lifeguarding.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/18/05
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Record Keeping Statistical Definitions O-2.3

Statistical Definitions
The Lifeguard Service follows the United States Lifesaving Associations definition of
statistical terms in order to determine statistics.

Beach Attendance: Normally people recreating in the water or on the sand, and at adjacent
picnic areas, parking lots, recreation concessions and bike paths. Does not include people that
merely transit on bikes or in cars.

Rescues: Total persons who are brought to safety by a lifeguard and usually involves
physical contact. Does not include people who are given oral instructions to move to a safer
location.

Boat Rescues: The physical rescue by boat or swimmer of a vessel that, if left unattended by
rescue personnel, would be in danger of sinking or being damaged; or the safety of the
passengers would be compromised.

Boat Assist: A vessel not in immediate danger but unable, under its own power, to reach its
destination.

Preventive Action: Verbal warnings to people who are in a position where, if they were to
remain or continue, their safety would be compromised; or actions taken to remove potential
hazards.

Drowning: Death caused by drowning as determined by the coroner

Guarded Drowning: Drowning that occurs within the guarded area when staffed by
lifeguards

Unguarded Drowning: All other drowning. Does not include fatalities discovered in the
water, where the cause is unrelated to respiratory impairment from submersion in the water.

Medical Aids: First aid or medical attention, serious enough to warrant a written report of
some nature. Does not include the act of distributing band aids.

Lost Persons: Minors or adults who are assisted in locating their parent, guardian or other
type of care provider.

Safety Lectures: Numbers of safety lectures on open water or related environments.

Students: Number of individuals attending each lecture.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Record Keeping Statistical Definitions O-2.3

Attendance
In applying the USLA definitions, the following formulas should be used by the supervising
lifeguards to calculate attendance at each facility. The resultant figure should be recorded as the
days attendance on the Daily Log. The Person in Charge should estimate beach attendance when the
main gate is not staffed.

South Region
Shadow Cliffs attendance = 80%(main gate attendance Monday - Friday) and 90%(main gate
attendance on weekends), 100% bus drop-offs, 80% of memberships

Del Valle West attendance = 60%[70%(main gate attendance Monday - Friday)] and
60%[80%(main gate attendance weekends)], 100% bus drop-offs, 80% of memberships

Del Valle East attendance = 40%[70%(main gate attendance Monday - Friday)] and
40%[80%(main gate attendance weekends), 100% bus drop-offs, 80% of memberships

Don Castro attendance = swim gate attendance

Cull Canyon attendance = swim gate attendance

Quarry Lakes attendance = swim gate attendance

North Region
Contra Loma attendance = swim gate attendance

Lake Anza = swim gate attendance

Temescal = swim gate attendance

Roberts = swim gate attendance

Diablo Foothills Castle Rock pool = swim gate attendance

Daily Log Statistical Definitions


The District records some statistics on the Daily log that are not defined by USLA. These
statistical definitions are listed below. Daily statistics are entered into an excel spreadsheet at the end
of each day by the PIC. For more information see Reference # O-2.1 Forms and Reports.

# Lifeguards in: The number of lifeguards that reported to work separate from those for
special events.

Weather/Temperature: The weather and maximum temperature for the day. Examples of
weather would be sunny, cloudy, rain, windy, etc.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Record Keeping Statistical Definitions O-2.3

Water Temperature: Surface water temperature of the swimming area.

Water Activity (low/med/high): An estimation by the PIC of the peak water activity relative
to a typical lifeguard service day.

Swim Area Reduced (y/n): Was the swim area reduced in size for any reason except to
support an aquatic program such as Junior Lifeguards.

Lifeguard Swim Hours Open (from/to): This records the time of day that lifeguards go in
service and time they go out of service.

Total Hours Open: This records the number of hours lifeguards were in service on a
particular day.

Groups (#/attendance): This records the number of groups that swam that day and their
total attendance, combining adults and children.

Safety Lectures (#/attendance): This records the number of safety lectures and their
attendance, combining adults and children. Typically each group should receive a safety
lecture.

Special Events (indicate type): These are events occurring in the park that require extra
staffing or unusual lifeguard service hours beyond regular hours guarding the swimming
areas. These would include triathlons, open water swims, opening early or closing late for
organized groups, fishing derbies, staffing educational booths, etc.

Pattern Dives: Incidents where the water is cleared in order to initiate a pattern dive/walk-
off for a missing person.

EMS Case # (from MIR): Each day will have the Fire incident number recorded of
incidents that used a MIR. At the end of the week, the total number of MIR incidents is
recorded.

Resuscitations: Incidents where a victim is not breathing or breathing insufficiently for life
and a lifeguard intervenes resulting in the patient being revived.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Maintenance Agreements O-3.1

Agreements with Park Supervisors


Each lifeguard staff is responsible for completing some maintenance duties in their
park. Following are descriptions of these duties. These lists dont address special requests or an
immediate correction of a safety issue. This type incident will be handled on a case-by-case
basis by the best available staff. The swim area should generally be kept clean throughout the
day by picking up litter while walking between stations.

Refer to Reference # O-1.2 Scheduling Procedures, Rotation Guidelines section for


more information on maintenance times during the day. Contact your Aquatic Supervisor if
you need more maintenance time in your schedule.

South Region

Don Castro
Pick litter from the sand and shallow water before the beginning of each day.
Maintain a clean restroom for all staff use.
Change trash liners on the sand if they fill during the day.
Put the full trash liners next to the trash cans and advise the ranger staff of the need for
pick-up prior to the end of each day.
Reconfigure the swimming area divider rope as operational conditions indicate.

Shadow Cliffs
Pick litter from the sand and shallow water of the swim area at the end of each day.
Pick litter from the sand in the morning as needed and throughout the day as priorities
allow.
Remove aquatic plants and animal remains from the swim area shore as needed.
Change trash liners in cans on the sand at the end of each day.
Change liners on beach cans as they fill during the day and notify ranger staff of having
done so.
Put the full trash liners next to the asphalt path near the beach at the end of each day.
Reconfigure the swimming area divider rope as operational conditions indicate.

Del Valle East


Pick litter from the gravel and shallow water of the swim area at the end of each day.
The perimeter of litter pick-up is defined by the Warning signs on the north and
south ends and the asphalt path to the east.
Pick litter from this gravel area in the morning as needed and throughout the day as
priorities allow.
Remove aquatic plants and animal remains from the swim area shore as needed.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/4/02


Last Revised: 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Maintenance Agreements O-3.1

Change trash liners in cans on this gravel area at the end of each day.
Change liners on these same cans as they fill during the day and notify ranger staff of
having done so.
Put the full trash liners next to the asphalt path at the end of each day.
Reconfigure the swimming area divider rope as operational conditions indicate.

Del Valle West


Pick litter from the gravel, lawn adjacent to the beach and shallow water of the swim
area at the end of each day. The perimeter of litter pick-up is defined by the Warning
sign on the south end, the swim rope anchor on the north and the end of the grass at the
bottom of the slope on the west.
Pick litter from this gravel and lawn area in the morning as needed and throughout the
day as priorities allow.
Remove aquatic plants and animal remains from the swim area shore as needed.
Change trash liners in cans on this gravel and lawn area at the end of each day.
Fill the dog waste pick-up bags as needed
Change liners on gravel-beach as they fill during the day and notify ranger staff of
having done so.
Put the full trash liners next to the concrete curb at the end of each day.
Reconfigure the swimming area divider rope as operational conditions indicate.

Quarry Lakes
Pick litter from the beach and shallow water of the swim area. Usually done at the end
of each day and more often as needed.
Change trash liners in cans on the sand at the end of each day and more often as
needed.
Put the full trash can liners at the desired location for park staff.
Remove aquatic plants and animal remains from the swim area shore as needed.
Notify Park Supervisor when boat dock needs to be moved due to low water level.
Notify Park Supervisor when gas is needed for boat.
Notify Park Staff for assistance with putting the boat in the water and taking it out of
the water.
Reconfigure the swimming area divider rope as operational conditions indicate.

Cull Canyon
Pick litter from the sand and shallow water at the end of each day.
Change trash liners in cans on the sand at the end of each day.
Change liners on cans as they fill during the day and notify ranger staff.
Put the full trash liners next to the trash cans at the end of each day.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/4/02


Last Revised: 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Maintenance Agreements O-3.1

Clean out the three skimmers under the chairs and (depending on the water level) a
fourth, which is to the left of chair #2. This is done twice a week (more often if
needed).
Reconfigure the swimming area divider rope as operational conditions indicate.

North Region

Contra Loma
Pick litter within the fenced swim area. Usually done at the end of each day and more
often as needed.
Assist park staff in maintaining cleanliness of all community areas: staff bathroom,
locker room, shower, etc.
Sweep underwater sand daily from wading rope to behind the berm.
Rake sand back from the edge of the berm as needed
Collect all floating debris daily
Assist with AFR clean up and subsequent water treatment and testing
Reconfigure the swimming area divider rope as operational conditions indicate.

Lake Anza
Pick litter from the beach, beach lawn, and shallow water of the swim area. Done at the
beginning and end of each day and more often as needed.
Change trash can liners on beach at the end of each day and more often as needed.
Deposit full liners in dumpster.
Reconfigure the swimming area divider rope as operational conditions indicate

Lake Temescal
Pick litter from the beach, beach lawn, and shallow water of the swim area. Done at the
end of each day and more often as needed.
Change trash can liners on beach at the end of each day and more often as
needed. Deposit full liners in dumpster.
Maintain posted material in beach bulletin board.
Reconfigure the swimming area divider rope as operational conditions indicate.

Roberts Pool
Pick litter from pool deck and lawn. Usually done at the end of each day and more
often as needed.
Change trash can liners on pool deck at the end of each day and more often as
needed.
Check restrooms for cleanliness, supplies at swim breaks and prior to evening lessons.
Place full liners behind roll-up door for park staff pick up.
Clean pool deck drains and pool skimmer baskets as needed on a daily basis.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/4/02


Last Revised: 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Maintenance Agreements O-3.1

Clean pool tiles on a weekly basis.


Cover and uncover pool with pool covers as needed.
Maintain and update posted material in pool bulletin board.
Reconfigure the swimming area divider rope and lane lines as operational conditions
indicate.

Diablo Foothills
Pick litter from pool deck and lawn. Usually done at the end of each day and more
often as needed.
Change trash can liners on pool deck at the end of each day and more often as
needed.
Check restrooms for cleanliness, supplies at swim breaks.
Place full liners behind roll-up door for park staff pick up.
Clean pool deck drains and pool skimmer baskets as needed on a daily basis.
Clean pool tiles on a weekly basis.
Cover and uncover pool with pool covers as needed.
Maintain and update posted material in pool bulletin board.
Reconfigure the swimming area divider rope as operational conditions indicate.
Assist in the removal of leaf debris from the pool as needed each morning.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/4/02


Last Revised: 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Maintenance Lifeguard Stations O-3.2

Lifeguard Stations
Lifeguard Stations are work areas for Aquatics business; everything in them should
contribute to that purpose. The appearance of the station reflects the professional service we provide.
It needs to be an appropiate place to bring every member of the public or staff that we contact.

Lifeguad stations are to be maintained in a neat, clean, and organized condition. Personal
belongings are to be stored in lockers. This includes magazines, clothing, dishes, equipment, etc.
Dishes need to be stored appropriately. Food should not be left out but stored in the refrigerator or in
insect proof containers and placed in a cabinet.

Office supplies, lifeguard equipment and first aid supplies are to be neatly stored in an
organized manner.

Issued material for posting should be clearly and neatly displayed, it should not be defaced
with doodles, editorial comments, etc.

The white boards, bulletin boards, lockers, walls, etc. are District property and should remain
in their issued condition. They should be used for District purposes only and present a professional
appearance.

Posted material intended to provide staff with useful information for their job is encouraged.
No material should disparage anyone, be of sexual nature, promote alcohol, tobacco or contain foul
language; this type of material may be offensive to others.

On a weekly basis (more often if needed) the station floor should be swept, shower, sink and
toilet cleaned, trash emptied, refrigerator cleaned of old food, etc.

The first aid cot (if equipped) should have two clean blankets, the first neatly spread out on
the pad and the second neatly folded at the foot.

If repair or maintenance is needed on the station plumbing, electrical or structural (doors,


walls, floor, ceiling) systems the Park Supervisor should be notified.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/11/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Maintenance Station Postings O-3.3

Lifeguard Station Postings

The focus of organized postings is to further promote the professional appearance of


our lifeguard stations and to present important information in visible areas. Optional postings
are restricted to those found on the list. Be aware that the posting of offensive material is not
allowed.

The postings are to be organized by four main categories: Employee Related Postings,
Phone Lists and Schedules, Lifeguard Operations and Optional Postings.

On the Workers Rights Poster the appropriate local numbers for your worksite for
Ambulance, Fire, Hospital, and Police in the Emergency information section should be filled
in. The Physician and Alternate spaces can be left blank. We have provided CAL-OSHA
numbers for both Alameda and Contra Costa Counties for you. These posters are updated
annually.

If you find that you are missing or need a new posting, please request it from your
Aquatic Supervisor.

The following postings list applies to all posting materials that are to be found in visible
areas throughout the lifeguard station.

Employee related postings


1. Kaiser Location Map
2. Kaiser Health Centers Contact Phone Numbers
3. Workers Comp Postings
A. Bragg & Associates
(Labeled with directions to check LSM section A-5.1)
B. If a Work Injury Occurs
4. Workers Rights Poster
5. ABCD of Melanoma Bookmark
6. Work Permits
7. Consent to Treat Minors
8. Universal Precautions Reminder
Phone lists and schedules for the current year
1. Lifeguard Service Contact Phone Numbers
2. Frequently Called Numbers
3. Lifeguard Service Schedule sample
4. Lifeguard Service-Important Events Schedule
5. In-service Training Schedule
6. Lifeguard Service Phone List
East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/3/07
Last revised: 4/3/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Maintenance Station Postings O-3.3

Lifeguard Operations
1. Facility Diagram
2. Open/Closing Procedures
3. Morning Briefing Outline
4. Head Chair and First Aid Station Equipment List
5. Most recent Supervisors Staff Meeting Agenda
6. Lifeguard Work Schedules (Present and upcoming week visible)
7. Procedures of Emergency Communication (laminated florescent yellow)
8. Financial Reference Sheet
9. Sample Time Card
10. Sample Expense Report
11. Patient Assessment
12. Yellow Emergency Card
13. Emergency Posting
14. Lifeguard Tasks
15. Hazardous Materials Disposal Protocol
16. E.B.R.P.D. Lifeguard Service Motivational Poster
17. Terminating an Underwater Search
Optional
1. Awards
2. News Articles

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/3/07


Last revised: 4/3/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Equipment Requests O-4.1

Requests

Requests for lifeguard supplies or equipment are to be given to the Aquatic Supervisor in
writing.

Supplies are issued at the beginning of the season with the objective of providing the
lifeguard staff with what they will need throughout the season. Sometimes due to storage limitations,
unusual circumstances, underestimation, etc. additional supplies will be needed.

Use of supplies should be closely monitored. Requests for additional supplies should be
made prior to running out. Anticipate that the order will take one week to fill once the Aquatic
Supervisor gets it. For urgent needs a telephone message is appropriate with a written follow up. An
email is adequate written follow-up.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 10/1/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Equipment Checks O-4.2

9Equipment Checks
Equipment checks are an important part of insuring that lifeguard equipment is
ready when needed, lives may literally depend on it.

The Daily Equipment Log is used to document that each item has been inspected
and is in serviceable condition. Serviceable condition means that the item is clean, dry, and
ready to perform as it was designed. Equipment not in serviceable condition will be taken
out of service by red tagging.

Each piece of equipment that is stocked with additional supplies will have an
associated checklist detailing the contents of the equipment. For example when checking
the trauma box, not only does the box itself need to be functioning as designed, but each
item inside needs to be present and in serviceable condition.

Following are some key pieces of equipment and a brief description of what to look
for during inspections:

Hasty Search Bags


inspect bag for wear and function
inspect mask for cracks, tears, wear in the masks rubber strap and
skirt
inspect the mask faceplate for cleanliness, cracks and security in the
mask frame
inspect the mask strap keepers for function
inspect fin foot pockets and blades for cracks, wear and function
inspect the snorkel surface and keeper for cracks and function

Marker Buoy
inspect anchor line wrap for easy deployment
inspect line for wear
inspect buoy and anchor condition

BOAT

The boat will be inspected daily by following the Daily Boat Inspection Checklist.
A summary follows:
inspect the PFDs for tears, missing or broken straps and condition

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/11/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Equipment Checks O-4.2

inspect and insure all boat equipment is stored securely and


neatly inside the hull
inspect the oars for cracks and that the oar stop functions
insure the oar lock fits snugly into the boats rail and the oar fits
into the oar lock
inspect the hull condition inside and out
insure the motor mounts are tight and secure to transom, they
should be locked in place
insure the prevent strap/chain is securely attached to the engine
and inside the hull at a secure location
insure there is at least 2 tank of gas
inspect the fuel line and bulb for cracks, wear, residue oil or fuel,
especially at connections
insure the fuel line connects to fuel tank and engine and that there
are no kinks or objects on the line
inspect the propeller for tightness, damage, fishing line and
debris
inspect the prop guard for tightness, dents, cracks
start and run engine for 5 minutes, insure the water outlet is
functioning and that the exhaust is not unusually thick and that
the engine starts easily and runs smoothly

RADIOS
insure inventory is correct
insure radio charger light works with radio in cradle
inspect radio exterior for damage
radio check with in-park staff or Dispatch
set volume and squelch for the days operation

TELEPHONE
inspect exterior
pick up receiver and listen for dial tone

FIRST AID KIT


inspect exterior handle, latches and box
inventory contents, replace as needed, insuring they are replaced
in correct location
inspect trays and hinges

MED PACK
inspect exterior for wear and function

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Equipment Checks O-4.2

insure all contents are present, functional and stored in the correct
location
insure the regulator is attached
open tank valve with pressure gauge turned away and check
pressure
replace tank at 500 psi or below

TORPEDO BUOYS/ RESCUE CANS


inspect exterior for critical wear
inspect hook for security and function
inspect shoulder strap and tow line
wrap tube for days service
store tube unwrapped when not in service

RESCUE BOARDS
inspect entire surface of board for cracks or dings that go through
to the foam core, red tag if present (note: if taking a board out of
service due to a ding will prevent opening, seal the ding with
waterproof tape and use that board as little as possible until
repaired)
inspect skeg for security and wear
inspect handles for security and function

ELECTRONIC MEGAPHONE
inspect exterior for cracks, missing or broken parts
pull trigger and speak into for test
flip toggle and test siren
check batteries for sufficient/equal power using battery tester

BINOCULARS
inspect exterior for cracks, missing or broken parts
look through and insure lenses are clean, clear and focus together
store with lens caps on

FORM HOLDER CLIPBOARD


inspect exterior for damage that hinders the function
insure inventory is correct
organize different forms with paper clips

BACKBOARD
insure the board is clean and functional

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Equipment Checks O-4.2

AED
insure green check is visible on device
inspect per checklist
insure pads are within expiration date

PFD
inspect for tears, cracks
insure device is in good repair and will function as designed

RED TAGS

Red tags are used to mark equipment that is out of service so that it is not
inadvertently used. The tag should be attached to a prominent area of the broken item. A
short note should be written on the red tag describing the problem. Notify your supervisor
regarding red tagged equipment.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Equipment Inventory Process O-4.3

Inventory Process

Lifeguard service equipment is inventoried by lifeguards at the


beginning and end of each season. Recording the inventory is a detailed
process that helps insure that all necessary equipment and supplies are ready
for each season.

The EBRPD Lifeguard Service Inventory form is used to record the inventory of each
facility.

Follow the instruction sheet that accompanies each inventory assignment. In general it will
include the following elements:

All items on the inventory need to be counted and inspected. It is OK to


estimate quantities of boxed items such as bandaids, gloves, and similar items.
Comment on any equipment needing repair or replacement (i.e. rescue boards,
boats, umbrellas, radios, etc.).
Record Lifeguard Service Numbers (LG#) when requested or applicable. This is
usually on the Equipment Numbers page. If an item is missing a sticker or the
sticker needs replaced, a note should be placed on the comments section.
Some items do not have stickers but the numbers are etched into the equipment
or written in permanent marker.

The following should help locate the LG#s on equipment:


Resuscitators sticker on regulator
Radios sticker and engraved
Rescue Board sticker on bottom of board in front of skeg
Backboard sticker and engraved
Boat hull large sticker
Boat engine large sticker

Record any additional items that you have that may not appear on the inventory
sheets.
Make comments on any additional equipment needed.
All equipment listed as stocked on the inventory should be fully stocked
according to its own inventory checklist. This insures it will be ready for the
following season. For more information see Reference #O-7.1 -- Season
Opening and Closing.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Equipment AED Administration O-4.4

AED Program Administration


The Aquatics unit defibrillation program is administered by Aquatics administrative staff. All
program requirements are overseen by the Aquatics Manager. These requirements are described in
California Code of Regulations Title 22, Division 9, Chapter 1.5, Articles 1-4 and Alameda County
policies #3201, #4000, #4205 and Contra Costa County policy # 18.

The Alameda County and Contra Costa County EMS Agency Medical Directors authorize the
Aquatics unit as a public safety AED service provider as long as the applicable code requirements
are met. District lifeguards are authorized to use automatic external defibrillators in the scope of
their employment as long as they are in compliance with applicable codes.

Some key elements of the program state the District will ensure:

1. Personnel who use an AED will be current in their training requirements for public safety
personnel according to Title 22, Chapter 1.5, Section 100019 and 100025.

2. Documentation will be kept on successful completion of periodic skills demonstration


sessions, for all Aquatic Staff who are authorized to defibrillate.

Initial training will consist of not less than 4 hours of training in AED and will cover the required
topics of Title 22, Chapter 1.5, Section 100020 (a) (1) (A-H) and (b).

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 12/12/05


Last Revised: 12/12/05
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations In Service Training Lifeguard Academy O-5.1

Lifeguard Academy

Training is an important aspect of insuring that lifeguards are ready and capable of
responding effectively when the need arises. The District recognizes several methods of training in
order to meet this objective.

Lifeguard Academy

This 80+ hour in service training covers the basic elements necessary for employees to begin
work as a qualified lifeguard for the District. Cadets are hired conditionally and are trained to State
of California and USLA standards for lifeguards. Cadets who pass this training, their provisional hire
and continue employment with the District are awarded Red Cross certificates in Waterfront
Lifeguarding, Oxygen, Preventing Disease Transmission, First Aid for Public Safety Personnel
(r.03) and CPR/AED for Lifeguards. At the beginning of the Academy, cadets are given materials
that contain requirements for successful completion as well as lecture information, reading
assignments and skill performance standards. Following the eight days of group training, cadets then
continue site specific training that includes shadowing a supervising or experienced lifeguard for
approximately two days on the job.

i) An important element of the two day facility training is completion of the On-Site New
Lifeguard Training Checklist. This document is used to verify that important elements of
in-service training have been discussed individually with, and demonstrated by, new
lifeguards. For more information see LSM O-5.6 New Lifeguard On-Site Training.

Completion of the New Lifeguard On-Site Training program and any make-up assignments
given at the Academy are necessary for a cadet to complete before being given sole responsibility for
a zone of water.

Once a cadet has completed all elements of the Lifeguard Academy by demonstrating
acceptable skills and knowledge, the Aquatic Supervisor and Head Lifeguard discuss and agree to
lift the cadets provisional hire status.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations In Service Training Morning Training O-5.2

Morning Training

Lifeguards are required to participate in morning training sessions.

The supervising lifeguards are responsible for planning training sessions


each week and overseeing their delivery and content. The In-Service
Training Calendar should be followed. This training calendar gives
general training categories to be covered each day. If the main topic is
covered and there is additional training time remaining, the staff should perform the physical activity
listed on the calendar for each day. The main training topic should not be sacrificed to complete the
physical activity. Because some facilities have different training needs, on designated days, there
are different group training plans. Lifeguards that have not completed topic A should complete
that topic, lifeguards that have already completed topic A, should then train on topic B. This is
also the case for facilities with boats; facilities with boats should train on topic A, for non-boat
facilities they should train on topic B. For every facility, if the PIC believes their staff needs to
train on a topic other than that listed on the calendar, they should contact their Aquatic Supervisor
for authorization.

In addition, specific training assignments will be issued once during the season. The general
guidelines for in-service training assignments are listed below.

In-Service Training Assignments

Training assignments are given in the In Service Training binder. The group training should
be conducted on the Supervisors meeting Wednesdays and the first Saturday following the LG II/III
meeting during morning training time. When deciding the start time for the training, the person
leading the training should take in consideration the time required for the training as well as the
scheduled work times of lifeguards who may be coming in. The given lesson plan is to be followed
with adaptation for specific staff needs. The person leading the training is responsible for checking-
off all lifeguards completing the training as indicated on the training assignment.

Lesson plans are developed to indicate key learning elements of the assignments. These plans
should provide enough information for staff to complete as a self-study for those not scheduled on
the group training day. Head Lifeguards will need to plan ahead for a time to efficiently check-off
the skills of these individuals.

Check-off Sheets
The LG III (or person designated by the Aquatic Supervisor) is responsible to ensure that
each lifeguard completes all training assignments and is checked off on the appropriate forms.
East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98
Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations In Service Training Morning Training O-5.2

Unfinished training assignments may affect a lifeguards rehire eligibility. The check-off sheet is due
to the Aquatic Supervisor at the Supervisors Staff meeting following the meeting in which it was
assigned. The LG III should advise the Aquatic Supervisor of those lifeguards who complete the
training assignment after the check-off sheet is turned in. When submitting the check-off sheet all
names assigned to that facility should be included on the check-off sheet regardless of their
completion status.

Check-off Person
The LG II/III should check-off all training assignments. They should complete the check-off
sheet that is given with the assignment. In the event that the LG II/III is unable to complete a check-
off on any individual due to scheduling conflicts, the PIC will be responsible for completing the
check-off.

Sunday Training
In general, Sunday training is designated as Full Simulation drills. The intent of this
training is to bring together several skills and apply them to a real life scenario. The PIC leading
the training should reasonably attempt to include as many aspects of a real life scenario as
possible. The following are some simulation topics:
Missing Person
Witnessed Submersion
Medical Aid
Spinal Injury
Impact Training

Missing In-Service Training Forms


It is the responsibility of the LG II/III or PIC to notify the Aquatic Supervisor in a timely
fashion should they become aware that the facility may be missing portions of the In-Service
training.

Additional In-Service Training Information


Physical conditioning is a useful element of the lifeguards job. Authorized physical
conditioning must be made up of lifeguard skill specific movements. Individual or group
calisthenics, paddling, swimming, relays/drills with rescue equipment such as rescue boards, rescue
tubes and rescue cans and running within the swim facility are permitted. Activities not on this
specific list need Aquatic Supervisor approval.

When training outside of the swim area, lifeguards must be identifiable to the public as staff.

Each lifeguard must tow a rescue tube when swimming outside the swimming area at open
water facilities.

Training materials, in addition to what is issued each season, are available from the Aquatic
Supervisor.

Every lifeguard must attend at least 16 hours of organized rescue skills training each season.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations In Service Training Certification Challenges O-5.3

Certification Reviews

The District conducts Red Cross certification opportunities in order to help staff maintain
minimum lifeguard certifications. These are conducted at scheduled times throughout the season.

Lifeguards are assigned as necessary and appropriate to sessions each season based upon
their regular work locations, expressed interest in taking these classes and operational needs. Staff is
typically re-certified in Waterfront Lifeguarding each season. As part of the in-service training time
when the review course is offered, the annual 550-yard requalification swim is conducted, as is a
CPR/AED for Lifeguards review. Staff typically participates in an First Aid for Public Safety
Personnel (Title 22) review every other year as this certificate is valid for 3 years.

Head Lifeguards, Assistant Head Lifeguards and those selected by Aquatic staff based on
merit are given the opportunity to complete an Emergency Response review class. The listed staff
typically participates in an Emergency Response review every other year as this certificate is valid
for 3 years.

Lifeguards are expected to take the responsibility to contact their Head Guard to get
scheduled in a review opportunity as needed.

Lifeguards that cannot make their facilitys review should contact their Aquatic Supervisor to
schedule attendance at an alternate location.

Re-certification sessions are conducted in a review format, with certifications in Waterfront


Lifeguarding, Emergency Response or First Aid for Public Safety Personnel, and CPR/AED for
lifeguards provided to successful staff.

Preparation for each of these sessions is part of the in service training calendar and training
assignments.

Staff must successfully complete their 550-year requalification swim in 10 minutes or less
each season to remain eligible for work. For more information see Reference # A-2.6 550 swim and
retakes.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations In Service Training Meetings O-5.4

Lifeguard Supervisors Staff Meetings

Lifeguard Supervisors staff meetings are conducted every other Wednesday during the
summer.

The agenda is set by the Aquatic Supervisors and Aquatic Manager.

Attendance is mandatory for supervisory lifeguards and absences must be approved by the
respective Aquatic Supervisor and forecasted whenever possible.

Information and material covered at these meetings is to be disseminated by supervising


lifeguards to staff in their morning training sessions or other meetings.

Supervising lifeguards should bring completed time cards, expense reports and weekly
paperwork to these meetings and turn them in to their Aquatic Supervisor.

Standing agenda items include discussion of operation policies, procedures and issues, a
training topic and an opportunity to resolve scheduling issues.

Attire is the Department issued polo shirt. See Reference #A-4.1Uniform Requirements for
more information.

Staff Meetings

Head Lifeguards may schedule staff meetings to conduct necessary business with
authorization from their Aquatic Supervisor.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations In Service Training Supplemental Training O-5.5

New Lifeguard Supplemental Training


On occasion first year lifeguards may benefit from additional training time in order to
develop their skills and experience.

This guideline has been developed to address that need. Two methods are available for first
year lifeguards to obtain additional training. The first is supplemental training lead by the Head
Lifeguard or PIC. The second is a shadow guarding opportunity at selected facilities.

Supplemental Training

First year lifeguards who are scheduled for two days or less of regular in-service training in a
particular week should attend supplemental training.

The Head Guard should schedule the training in a two-hour block between 11am and 6pm.

The training topics should focus on basic skills needed by the individuals in attendance.

Training should be recorded on the Training Log on the day it is conducted.

Head Guards should notify their Aquatic Supervisor when this training is scheduled along
with the topics they expect to cover.

The training should be scheduled and conducted in a way that does not diminish from the
lifeguard service. If the rotation guidelines need altered to accommodate this training, the Aquatic
Supervisor should approve the alternate rotation. For more information on the rotation guidelines see
Reference # O-1.2.

Shadow Guarding

First year lifeguards from Roberts, Temescal and Quarry Lakes are encouraged to schedule
an additional three weekend days of shadow guarding during the summer. Ideally each of these days
will be at a different facility. Facilities of choice are Del Valle East or West, Contra Loma and
Shadow Cliffs. Don Castro, Cull Canyon or Anza can be used as back up facilities if necessary. The
goal is to give first year lifeguards an opportunity to gain experience guarding moderate to large
crowds away from their home facility.

Once the schedule change is arranged the effected Aquatic Supervisor should be notified of
the voluntary change of assignment as detailed in Reference # O-1.5 Change of Assignment.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 5/1/03


Last revised 3/31/04
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations In Service Training New Lg. On-Site Training O-5.6

New Lifeguard On-Site Training

A critical component of the Lifeguard Academy is two days of on-site training. The following guidelines
are to assist staff in conducting this training. The New Lifeguard On-site Training Checklist is to be
completed for each new lifeguard as soon as possible. The primary topics should be completed within the
first two to three days on-site but no later than the Deadline for Returning Lifeguard Check-in found in
each seasons Important Events Schedule. The secondary topics should be completed by July 1 each
season. If there is a problem meeting either of these deadlines, the Aquatic Supervisor should be
contacted.

1. New lifeguards should be scheduled to start their on-site training as soon as possible following the
eighth day of the Academy. The sooner they complete their initial training, the sooner they can help
fill schedule openings. Before scheduling new lifeguards for their continued training, consideration
should be given to which staff are working that day so that each new lifeguard is paired with an
appropriate trainer (see #2 below).

2. New lifeguards are assigned a trainer for each on-site training day. Trainers should follow these
guidelines and the New Lifeguard On-site Training Checklist. Preferably, new lifeguards will be
paired with Head or Assistant Head Lifeguards. When this is not possible, a veteran lifeguard with
good teaching skills should be chosen.

3. Each line item in the Checklist is to be initialed and dated by both the trainer and trainee upon
successful completion. All topics on the Checklist that have a check box must be checked off before
initialing the topic. The check verifies the trainee has demonstrated to the trainer competency in the
sub-category. This Lifeguard Service Manual should be referenced where indicated.

4. It is critical that new lifeguards not take solo responsibility for guarding any zone of water until the
Head Lifeguard, in consultation with the Aquatic Supervisor, determines that they are sufficiently
prepared and capable. New lifeguards are to spend a minimum of two days shadow guarding in during
the On-Site Training program. If a new lifeguard requires more than three days of shadow guarding,
the Head Guard should immediately notify their Aquatic Supervisor.

5. Should any performance issues arise during on-site training, the PIC should immediately notify their
Aquatic Supervisor.

6. Training new lifeguards presents an excellent time to review skills and procedures with returning
lifeguard staff, full advantage should be taken of this opportunity.

7. Make the most of on-site training days. New lifeguards should be continually informed and tested
throughout the day, even while backing.

8. When training new lifeguards, steps should be taken to avoid being perceived as over-staffed.
Lifeguards should be kept spread out whenever possible and, as always, work diligently and
efficiently.

9. The Aquatic Supervisor should be contacted if questions arise regarding conducting this training.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/11/03


Last Revised: 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations In Service Training New Lg. On-Site Training O-5.6

Following are topics covered by the New Lifeguard On-Site Training Checklist

Primary/Critical Topics: The following critical topics are to be completed within the first 2-3
days of on-site training
1) Staff Introductions
a) Lifeguards and park staff
2) Facility Orientation (LSM A-2.2)
a) Lifeguard station and park
3) Shadow Guarding Topics
a) Zone Coverage and Scanning Techniques (LSM S-2.1)
Describes methods for maintaining vigilance, including the 5-minute scan
Effectively scans zone in 20 seconds or less
o Maximum swimmers in zone _________________
Understands zone boundaries, including overlap and possible variations (i.e.-2
lifeguards in the chair)
b) Scanning Techniques (LSM S-1.1 Avoid Boredom and Distractions, S-2.2) ___
Gives examples of various methods to avoid distractions and boredom
Understands the purpose and describes Hot Day strategies
Maintains scan when enforcing rules or when spoken to by other personnel or by a
patron
Mentally rehearses rescues
Understands and demonstrates techniques of the 5-minute scan
c) Prevention
i) Dry Land Observations
Describes statistical risk factor profiles
ii) Beach and Swim Area Hazards
Gives examples of at least 5 beach hazards and 5 swim area hazards
iii) Swim Area, Beach and Park Rules and Regulations (LSM S-3.2)
Understands all posted rules
Understands and uses discretionary rules
iv) Initiative in Taking Preventive Action (LSM S-3.1, S-3.3) _____________________
Understands purpose and procedures for swim tests and swim breaks
Is proactive about using chest-deep water rule and keeping swimmers off swim ropes
d) Distressed v. Drowning Presentation
Explains the different signs of each presentation and describes physical characteristics
Recognizes potential victims
e) Communication
i) With Public and With Lifeguards (LSM O-6.4)
Provides reasonable responses to potential questions or comments from patrons
Understands specific lifeguard jargon (i.e. bump, LC, missing person, etc.)
Demonstrates lifeguard hand signals
ii) Voice Guns and Megaphones (LSM O-6.3)
Demonstrates ability to use voice gun and megaphone effectively when making
common rule enforcement calls

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/11/03


Last Revised: 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations In Service Training New Lg. On-Site Training O-5.6

Recognizes different tones on voice gun and what different tones are used for
Recites emergency notification, closing announcement, and swim break notification
iii) Radios (LSM O-6.1)
Explains and demonstrates general use
Explains emergency use
Explains and demonstrates proper handling
f) Proper Posture (LSM S-1.1 Maintain Posture)
Demonstrates proper posture that conveys alertness and readiness.
Uses a 5 minute interval for changing positions
Describes unacceptable postures when lifeguarding
g) Rotation and Proper Chair Transitions (LSM S-1.6) _____________________
Executes a proper rotation, transition, and understands how rotations may vary
Properly demonstrates a thorough zone briefing and station change
Carries RFD when transitioning between stations
h) Station Responsibilities (LSM S-1.1, S-1.2, S-1.3, S-1.4, S-1.5)
Understands the position of all stations and associated station duties
i) Making Rescues (LSM E-3.1)
Demonstrates effective rescue tube rescue
Demonstrates effective rescue board rescue
j) CPR/Airway Management
Adult/Child/Infant
k) Basic Missing Person Procedures ____________________
Recites four questions asked when a missing person is reported
Initiates pattern search appropriately, knows when and how marker buoy is deployed
Understands found child procedure

Secondary Topics: The following topics are to be completed by July 1


4) Daily Lifeguard Documentation (LSM O-2.1)
5) Set Up and Opening Procedures
a) Equipment checks (LSM O-4.2)
b) Lifeguard chairs, first aid station, boat (LSM O-7.3)
c) Daily briefing procedure (LSM O-7.4)
6) Boat Operations (New lifeguards are not allow to operate boats outside
of training until Head Guard determines they are sufficiently skilled)
7) Maintenance Duties (LSM O-3.1, LSM O-3.2)
8) Review Emergency Reports
9) Review Medical, Lifesaving and Emergency Procedures
a) Patient assessment and M.I.R.
b) Oxygen delivery
c) Spinal injuries
d) Missing person
10) Head Guard Expectations
a) Scheduling (LSM O-1.4), time cards (LSM A-1.2), maintenance (LSM O-3.1, LSM O-3.2),
Etc.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/11/03


Last Revised: 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference#
Operations Communications Radio Use O-6.1

Communications

All Park District communication equipment is to be used for official business only.
This includes telephones, radios, message machines, voice guns, etc.

Radio Use

The Park District maintains an extensive radio


communication system. There are currently 9 Park District channels
licensed by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC).
District use of this system must adhere to this licensing agreement.

Lifeguards are provided with portable two way radios in


order to help them communicate within the District. It is common to
communicate between lifeguards, to other park staff and to the Districts Dispatch center
for various needs.

The Park Districts Dispatch center is authorized as a 911 public safety answering
point and known as Control 1.

Radios should be viewed as valuable tools that are used to help complete our job.

For Lifeguard Service, Fire, and Park Operations the normal channel for day-to-day
use will be Channel 4. For emergencies, or any messages that needs to be broadcast
District-wide or contact with Dispatch is necessary, or the parties are out-of-range for
direct communications, use the new Channel 3, which is repeated.

Note that in the following table, Channels 1, 3, and 5 are highlighted in grey. These
are the only channels you can use to contact Dispatch or broadcast your message District-
wide. The other channels are considered talk-around channels for local use in the field as
indicated above, and Dispatch does not monitor them.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference#
Operations Communications Radio Use O-6.1

The District channels are:


Channel # Name Use
1 Police Primary Repeater Police officers to Dispatch
(hilltop transmitters)
2 Police Direct Vehicle to vehicle or
portable non-repeated
3 Operations/Fire Repeater Ops/Fire to Dispatch
Lifeguards (hilltop transmitters)
4 Operations/Fire Direct vehicle to vehicle or
Lifeguards portable, non-repeated
routine operations
5 Police/Fire/Ops Repeater High level hilltop
transmitters event specific
6 Operations Special event vehicle to
vehicle or portable
7 Police/Fire Tactical Incident Use
8 Police/Fire Tactical Incident Use
9 Police/Fire Tactical Incident Use

Channel 3 has the benefit of having the hilltop receiver/transmitters re-broadcast


(repeat) radio transmissions which can be heard District-wide.

Channel 4 has the ability to bypass the District-wide system and have direct, line-
of-sight local ground communications by using the talk-around feature as long as you are
in range with the other party you wish to communicate with.

Lifeguards are authorized to use Channel 4 as their primary communication


channel. Channel 3 may be used for communication with Dispatch on incidents, to go in
and out of service each day or contact staff on a District-wide basis. Using Channels 5-9
will be authorized by Dispatch at the request of an Incident Commander. Not all lifeguard
radios have all the channel capabilities and are thus limited in that regard.

All communication is in clear text. This means that typically no radio


codes are used.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Radio Use O-6.1

Lifeguards need to become familiar with the operation of their radios: channel
selection, volume control, push-to-talk button, etc.

Hold the push-to-talk button for at least 1 to 2 seconds before speaking. Speak
clearly into the radio microphone when it is 1" to 2" from your face. Avoid yelling.

Keep your communications as brief as possible so that you dont tie up the
frequency.

Be professional; remember many people, including those from other


agencies, can hear you.

Keep the volume at a level where it can be heard. Be careful not to turn it
down while speaking with someone in person and forget to turn it back up.

Before keying the microphone to speak make sure no one else is transmitting.

When initiating communication on the radio state the location, position and
last name of the person you are trying to reach and then identify yourself. For
example, Don Castro Lifeguard Jones this is Don Castro Lifeguard Smith or
Control 1 this is Don Castro Lifeguard Smith.

They will reply with something like: Don Castro Lifeguard Smith this is
Don Castro Lifeguard Jones, go ahead. You then tell them your message.

Emergencies

When communicating an emergency with Dispatch, make sure you state the words
emergency traffic in the initial communication. For example, Control 1 this is Don
Castro Lifeguard Smith with emergency traffic.

During some park emergencies, the channel may be made


red by Dispatch. Often there will be a series of tones broadcast
over the air (commonly referred to as a tone out) that advise
District firefighters and others of an emergency. During, and for
some time following, these tone outs the channel is often red (sometimes referred to as
Code 33 by Dispatch). This means that only emergency communications should be made.
There will be a single tone broadcast at a regular interval to remind park staff that the
channel is red. Normal business radio traffic should wait until the channel is made green.
If a lifeguard emergency occurs simultaneously, lifeguards should not hesitate in using the
radio to contact Dispatch or communicate with others while handling the emergency.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/31/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Radio Use O-6.1

Handling Portable Radios

Portable radios are expensive to replace and indispensable to


the lifeguard operation. For this reason they require special
handling.

Wear the radio, either clipped on a fanny pack or in its


harness when entering and exiting a boat, taking it on a
medical or any other time you need to carry it.

Place radios in radio holders while in lifeguard chairs.

Do not leave them unattended in lifeguard chairs or at backer


locations unless absolutely necessary. Transfer of radio responsibility
should occur during lifeguard rotations.

At the end of the day, the last lifeguard up is responsible for making
sure the radio is placed in its charger. Once placed in the charger, turn the
radio off for charging overnight. Be sure the charge indicator light is on.
The PIC is responsible for checking that all radios are accounted for and
charging before locking the station.

Avoid dropping them in the sand or other rough handling.

If a radio falls into the water it will likely be ruined. Retrieve the
radio as quickly as possible. If it was submerged, turn it off, remove the
battery, clean it of bottom debris, place and leave it in a clean bucket of
water to avoid corrosion. Advise the Person in Charge who should page the
Aquatic Supervisor. The Aquatic Supervisor will pick up the radio and take
it in for repair as soon as possible.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/31/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 4
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Telephone Use O-6.2

Telephone Use
District telephone and voice mail are provided for
District business. All communications over the phone need to
represent the District in a professional manner.

When answering the phone give your facility location and name. For example,
Hello, this is the Del Valle West Beach Lifeguard Station, Joe speaking, can I
help you?

Keep telephone conversations brief and to items of business.

Local, brief, infrequent personal calls are authorized for such things as arranging a
ride home, advising someone of your work schedule, etc.

Other personal calls should be made from public telephones while on break.

When taking messages for others, or if unable to provide information that the caller is
seeking, take their name and number and pass the message on to the appropriate
person.

Voice Mail

The standard out going message on Lifeguard Service answering machines should be:
Hello, you have reached the East Bay Regional Park District
Lifeguards at (park name). If this is an emergency, please hang up
and dial 911. For reservations or information about other District
parks, please call 1-888-327-2757 that number again is 1-888-
EBPARKS. If you would like to leave a message for a lifeguard,
please do so after the beep and we will return your call. Thank you.

Messages are to be checked throughout the day and by the PIC as part of the opening
procedures. It is important to give messages to the intended party.

Each lifeguard station should have a place for posting telephone messages.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Voice Gun O-6.3

Voice Gun
Lifeguards are provided with electronic voice amplification megaphones
that are commonly referred to as voice guns. This reference is used to
avoid confusion with the plastic megaphones that dont amplify voice.

Use
The megaphones are primarily used to make a verbal prevent with someone in water far from
shore where a backer cannot contact them easily. It is commonly used to ask someone to swim an
over-arm stroke while in deep water. The megaphone helps provide direction to the lifeguards voice
but does not amplify it.

The voice gun is primarily used to clear the water during emergencies and secondarily if
using the megaphone fails during a preventive action. It is important to avoid overuse of the voice
gun because the public will stop responding to it if they hear it too often.

Voice guns are used by first adjusting the volume output and then pulling the trigger on the
handle. Voice guns are delicate so special care is needed in handling them. Avoid placing them in
areas where they may be knocked off the chair.

When using either a voice gun or megaphone, start by getting the person you are trying to
contact to look your way and pay attention. When they are looking toward you, tell them your
message. When using a megaphone, you will need to yell loudly, slowly and distinctly in order to be
heard and understood. With a voice gun, speak slowly and clearly into the mouthpiece without
shouting.

Emergencies

The voice gun is the lifeguards best tool for clearing the water during an emergency. The
Head Chair lifeguard is usually responsible for this duty.

Begin by standing up in the chair. Adjust the volume to its loudest setting without
getting feedback.

Change the toggle switch over to siren, pull the trigger and the siren will sound.
Sweep the voice gun back and forth in the direction of the water.

Once the swim area becomes quiet and you have gotten everyones attention (takes
about 5 seconds), switch the toggle switch back to voice and say something like:

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/30/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Voice Gun O-6.3

May I have your attention please, we have an


emergency. Everyone must get out of the water
immediately. Come straight in to shore as quickly as
possible.
Repeat this statement as often as necessary.

It is often helpful, for those that may not understand what you are saying, to use your arm to
motion people toward shore.

Quarry Lakes

Students from the California School for the Deaf frequently visit Quarry Lakes swim area,
their school is located within a couple miles of Quarry Lakes. When the lifeguards need to clear the
water, they are challenged with communicating with the students who cannot hear.

A flagging system that students can recognize will help them understand when an emergency
occurs. The flags will be waved by the lifeguards in the chairs as an emergency or swim break
announcements are being made and then will be put up in the lifeguard chair for the duration of the
emergency or swim break.

The following colored flags will be used:

Red Flag Aquatic Emergency. All visitors must exit the water.

Yellow Flag Swim Break. All children 15 years old or younger must completely exit the water.

Once the emergency or swim break is over then the flag will be taken down.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/30/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Feedback O-6.4

Public Feedback
Lifeguarding is a highly visible job and lifeguards are thus often recipients of public
comment. Because the lifeguard service exists as part of the District=s overall mission to serve the
public, it is important for every lifeguard to respond appropriately to public feedback.

The following guidelines provide a framework for lifeguards to use whenever contacted by
the public.

+First, recognize that lifeguards work for the public. Provide everyone offering
feedback the feeling that we appreciate them for taking their valuable time to bring a
matter of concern, or compliment to our attention. Correct situations that are in within
your area of authority.

+With this in mind, listen attentively, be polite and professional. If you are up in the
chair, contact a backer who can give the person their full attention. Explain that you
want to hear what they have to say but you need to watch the water until relieved by a
backer. If the feedback doesnt require your specific attention, have the backer deal
with the individual so that no surveillance shift change needs to occur.

+Once you=ve heard their comment, repeat the main points of it back in order to
confirm that you=ve understood what they are saying. Write down the details of the
incident (who, what, when, where, etc.) if necessary or in situations where you will
need to pass the information on.

+Thank the individual for bringing the issue up. Validate their feelings by
empathizing with the situation they are in. It may help to express some sympathy. If a
complaint is directed toward you do not take it personally or become defensive.

+If it is a policy issue and you know the reasons for it, explain to the person why
something is being done the way it is. All lifeguards should be comfortable
explaining the reason for our swim area rules. For more information see Reference
#S-3.2 --Visitor Rules and Regulations. If we are not following a policy, correct the
situation and apologize. If it is a hazardous situation, deny access to the area until
fixed. See that the hazard is fixed as soon as possible by the best available resource.
In any event, explain the actions you will take to address their concerns

+If these actions don=t satisfy them, contact the Person in Charge for their input.
Also be prepared to provide the individual with your first name and position if they
ask.

+If the area of public concern is in the Park Supervisor=s jurisdiction, ask for the
individuals name and phone number and provide this to the Park Supervisor. If they

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/11/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Feedback O-6.4

are irate and want immediate action contact the Park Supervisor or designee to handle
it.

Person in Charge

If you are unable to resolve the issue, ask for the individuals name and phone number so that an
Aquatic Supervisor may contact them. Also, provide them with the Aquatic Supervisor=s name and
phone number. All incidents involving lifeguard services that go unresolved need to be relayed to the
Aquatic Supervisor. If appropriate, page the Aquatic Supervisor to see if they can deal with the
incident personally. If you expect the public to call or write, it is important that the Aquatic
Supervisor be advised of the situation as soon as possible.

Aggressive Park Visitors

If a lifeguard sees or is made aware of an aggressive park visitor they should


follow these fundamental objectives.

+Contact Dispatch for assistance. Be prepared to provide incident details so


that the appropriate resources can be dispatched. If necessary retreat from the area
and then, from a safe distance, provide information with regular updates to Dispatch.

+Don=t approach or stay in situations where your personal safety may be in jeopardy.
This includes hostile park visitor behavior, threats of physical harm, implied acts of
violence or displaying weapons. The water or a locked lifeguard station may be the
best options for refuge.

+Take reasonable defensive steps to protect yourself from physical attack or harm.

+Never physically engage the public, use park property and/or equipment in hostile situations
to control their actions, or prevent them from leaving the area.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/11/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Media Relations O-6.5

Media Relations
It is important for lifeguards to recognize that the media performs a critical role in our society
and that they have a legitimate need for information. The media often offers a good medium to
publicize District programs, services and water safety information.

The District maintains a policy of open communication with the media and public with the
intent of providing reliable and timely information. However, the District prefers to communicate
with the press using authorized representatives that have knowledge of the matters being discussed
and are empowered to speak as District representatives.

In general, inquiries about events in the District should be referred to the Districts Public
Affairs department, or Public Safety Dispatch if outside normal business hours. On site, lifeguards
should refer media inquiries to the Person in Charge because they are in the best position to deal
with the inquiry appropriately.

No employee should discuss information with outside parties concerning public injuries or
accidents which may result in litigation against the District, personnel issues, matters of negotiation
that are underway, or other matters that the General Manager, Managers, or Supervisors have
determined to be confidential. This commonly applies to lifeguards when a recent major medical,
crime, drowning, etc. has occurred at a facility and there are media inquiries for information. In these
cases give the inquiring party the option of contacting Public Safety Dispatch, Public Affairs,
Aquatic Supervisor or Aquatic Manager.

Lifeguards may respond to inquiries when they have direct personal knowledge about an
issue after being given authorization to represent the District from the Aquatic Supervisor. In some
instances this authorization may be withheld or authorization may be delayed, for investigative,
humanitarian or legal reasons. Refer Lifeguard Service policy questions in this regard to the Aquatic
Supervisor.

General Guidelines for Handling Media Inquires

When speaking to the media keep in mind the following:

Lifeguard response to media requests for information should be coordinated closely with the
Public Affairs department. This should be done by contacting the Public Affairs departments
Public Information Supervisor and advising them that there is a member of the media
requesting information from lifeguards. If the contact occurs prior to an opportunity to advise
Public Affairs, do so after the fact.

Early in the season, the media commonly wants to get a story and/or photos about swimming
opportunities for upcoming warm weather. This often presents a good opportunity to
publicize water safety information. Without compromising public safety, lifeguard
cooperation with photographs and stories is encouraged.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Media Relations O-6.5

Respond as promptly as possible to media inquiries but dont be pressured into responding
until you are informed and prepared.

Remain professional at all times. Remember you are representing the District

Always identify yourself by title and Park District affiliation.

Use the entire agency name when making reference to the East Bay Regional Park District.

Make sure you are in the appropriate uniform.

I dont know is a perfectly acceptable answer.

Do not comment on actions or policies of other agencies or departments. Try to refer the
inquiry to the agency, department or person who may have the requested information.

Stick to the facts. Do not guess, speculate, engage in hearsay, offer opinions or respond to
hypothetical questions. Without full knowledge and understanding of the circumstances of an
incident or decision, you are poorly situated to evaluate the actions of others or speculate
about causation. Usually a comment like, Im not in a position to comment on that is
satisfactory.

Think carefully before you respond. Remember, nothing is off the record.

Keep your answers brief and to the point.

Access at Emergencies

The media has a legal right to access emergency scenes except in two situations:

1) The area is a crime scene


2) Media presence will interfere with emergency operations

Refer media to the Incident Commander or Public Information Officer at emergency scenes.
If they are granted access, but are in your way at an incident, politely ask them to move to a better
location, otherwise ignore their presence and conduct the incident according to protocol.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Swim Groups O-6.6

Group Presentations
Lifeguards are often asked to perform public speaking assignments to groups at District
facilities. When performing these assignments it is important to stress our safety procedures and to
represent the District and Lifeguard Service in a highly professional manner.

On occasion, lifeguards may be asked to perform public speaking assignments outside of


District facilities. This may be allowed following Aquatic Supervisor approval.

Swim Groups
Swim Groups defined:

The following guidelines apply to groups, in a day care or school/camp setting, of 10 or more
children. This procedure also applies to groups who have made a private pool rental and/or have paid
for early/late lifeguard service. See Reference # O-6.8 Facility Rental for more information.

For swim groups from public schools, group leaders are to provide lifeguard staff with
participant waivers for each child, each time the school visits. The PIC will turn these waivers in
with weekly paperwork to Aquatics staff.

Notification

It is important for lifeguards to receive notification of swim groups so that staffing levels and
rotations can be correctly planned for the day. Notification should come in the form of a Swim
Group Notification letter issued by the Reservations Department in the pre and post season. During
the peak season (approximately mid-June through mid-August) the PIC should check their facilitys
folder on the shared network drive. On short notice, staff may receive a telephone call from
Reservations. Groups should be marked on the master calendar with a notation of children and adults
(50c + 5a) and on weekly schedules. See Reference # O-1.1 General Scheduling Guidelines for more
information.

Park or swim gate personnel should notify lifeguard staff that a group has arrived for
swimming. The Head Lifeguard should make this arrangement via the Park Supervisor.

When a group arrives, and prior to swimming, the backing or break lifeguard should make
contact with the group leader in order to deliver a safety lecture and collect participant waivers from
public school groups. The meeting is a good practice even for groups that are making a repeat visit
because repeating safety information is important for a childs retention. It also sets a safety tone
for the day.

The lifeguard meeting with the group leader should follow the Swim Group Safety Talk
checklist to ensure nothing important is left off of the orientation.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/23/03


Last revised: 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Swim Groups O-6.6

Swim Group Log

The Swim Group Log should be completed when speaking with the group leader. The log is
intended to document data on each group visit and to identify concerns so they can be resolved
efficiently. Every group should be recorded on the log.

Group Leader Instructions

The leader should be given the blue safety card handout. All items on each side of the card
should be reviewed in detail with the group leader.

Following is a sample of the cards content:

WELCOME TO THE SWIM FACILITIES OF THE


EAST BAY REGIONAL PARK DISTRICT!

For a fun and SAFE visit, please review the following information:
In the event of an emergency, please contact a lifeguard immediately. If you are unable to contact a
lifeguard, use any park phone to call 911. If you plan to use a cell phone in an emergency, please be
aware that you must dial (510) 881-1121 to reach E.B.R.P.D. Public Safety Dispatch. We
recommend that each counselor program this emergency phone number into his/her cell phone in
preparation for your visit.
THANK YOU for giving us advanced notification of your visit.
If you did not give us advanced notification, please do so in the future by contacting our Reservations
Department at (888) 327-2757 option 2 or FAX (510) 635-5502. Your notification will allow us to
meet your safety needs.
It is mandatory that constant supervision be maintained at all times. One adult for every ten
children is required.
Group leaders must be in the water or on the shoreline providing constant supervision for all
water activities.
Before swimming, please see the lifeguards to arrange a Safety Talk for your group.
The lifeguard staff will conduct a Swim Test for children who wish to swim past chest-deep water.
Please assign a counselor to be present throughout the swim test to take note of which children
pass/fail. Leaders are responsible for keeping their children in areas that are appropriate for their
abilities.
We recommend that you create land and water boundaries for your group.
Please take regular head counts throughout the day.
Report any missing persons to a lifeguard immediately.
Participant waivers must be provided to lifeguard staff for each child on a public school trip.
We recommend that you have on-site medical information and emergency contact numbers for each
person in your group.
Please pick up trash and all personal items before leaving.

THANK YOU FOR YOUR COOPERATION!


WE HOPE YOU ENJOY YOUR VISIT!

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/23/03


Last revised: 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Swim Groups O-6.6

DROWNING FACTS

Drowning can happen suddenly and silently.


It only takes seconds.

In California, drowning is the leading cause of injury death for children


under the age of 15.

DROWNING IS PREVENTABLE

WATER SAFETY TIPS


Watch your children! Constant supervision is required at all times when in,
or near, the water.

Learn to swim and stay within your swim abilities.

Swim near a lifeguard.

Swim with a buddy. Dont swim alone!

Dont float where you cant swim.

Take a break. Dont swim when youre tired or cold.

Stay hydrated and re-apply sun block regularly.

Wear a lifejacket while boating.

Dont drink alcohol and swim.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/23/03


Last revised: 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Swim Groups O-6.6

Safety Lectures to Swim Groups

A safety lecture should be given to groups visiting the swim area before they enter the water
whenever possible. Pool rentals, early lifeguard service and groups from public schools will always
receive a safety lecture prior to swimming. Be friendly and encourage child interaction. In general
the process should proceed according to the checklist on the Swim Group Safety Talk form (copied
below):

Discussion With Group Leader:

Introduce yourself and welcome them to the facility.


Fill-out Swim Group Log.
GIVE BLUE SAFETY CARD TO GROUP LEADER AND REVIEW IT WITH THEM
IN DETAIL.
Collect participant waivers for each child swimming if its a group from a public school.
Make sure all chaperones for the group understand their supervision responsibilities.
Ask if they have any special needs or rules they would like you to cover in the safety talk.
Let them know that the lifeguards are available if they need any assistance.
Any questions? Thank you for your help.

Safety Talk:
Introduce yourself and welcome them to the facility.

Can everyone hear me?


Safety talk ensures that everyone has a safe and enjoyable visit.
Point out the FIRST AID STATION (backer table), LIFEGUARD CHAIRS,
RESTROOMS, SHOWERS, DRINKING FOUNTAINS, and VENDING
MACHINE/SNACK BAR.
Explain SHALLOW WATER ROPE, CHEST DEEP WATER RULE (have all kids
demonstrate), OVER-ARM STROKE, and SWIM TEST and WRIST BAND policies.
Let them know that lifeguards will loan them a lifejacket if requested.
Review commonly enforced rules:
9 FOLLOW THE LIFEGUARDS INSTRUCTIONS AT ALL TIMES
9 REVIEW SWIM FACILITY HAZARDS: _____________ _____________
______________
9 NO FLOATS PAST THE SHALLOW WATER ROPE
9 NO THROWING SAND/ROCKS
9 NO ROUGHHOUSING OR DUNKING
9 NO SCUBA MASKS OR SNORKELS
East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/23/03
Last revised: 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Swim Groups O-6.6

9 _________________________________
9 _________________________________
9 _________________________________
Review Swim Break purpose and procedures (if applicable).
Sun block reminder.
Please alert a lifeguard if you, or anyone else, needs assistance. Lifeguards are wearing
uniforms.
Please do not litter. Pick up three pieces of garbage before you leave.
Any questions?
Thank you for listening and have a fun day!!

Unannounced Groups

If a group arrives unannounced, lifeguards should contact the group leader, and brief the
group as if they had made proper notification.

It is also very important to point out that, while the notification is not a reservation to swim,
it allows staff to avoid overcrowding a swim area with groups, helps insure appropriate staffing and
is likely to insure a more pleasant and safe visit for all.

Notify the Aquatic Supervisor if a group repeatedly arrives unannounced. The Aquatic
Supervisor will contact the programs director.

Group Capacities

In order to prevent overcrowding, the Reservations Department monitors group attendance


through the swim group notification process. Listed below are each swim areas group capacity.
Whenever possible, Reservations will redirect swim groups to nearby facilities or attempt to
schedule on another day, to avoid exceeding these capacities. Another alternative is for groups to
divide themselves into smaller units and take turns swimming. This is often done at Roberts. Staff is
encouraged to help facilitate this arrangement when necessary.

Contra Loma 400 Del Valle East and West Open


Cull Canyon 400 Don Castro 400
Lake Anza 400 Quarry Lakes Open
Lake Temescal 400 Shadow Cliffs Open
Roberts 100

Addressing Problems

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/23/03


Last revised: 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 5 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Swim Groups O-6.6

Along with monitoring swimmer safety, lifeguards should pay particular attention to the
supervision being provided by group leaders while their children are swimming. Repeated
supervision, or other behavior concerns, should be addressed by the PIC with the group leader. If the
situation goes unresolved, the Aquatic Supervisor should be notified so they can contact the groups
director. PICs have the authority to prohibit groups from swimming if unresolved safety concerns
arise. For example, the group doesnt fulfill our requirements regarding adult supervision or child
behavior or as a public school they dont provide participant waivers for each of their children.

Swimming Prior to Lifeguard Service

At facilities that allow swimming without lifeguard service, groups may sometimes attempt
to swim before lifeguards go on duty. This practice should be strongly discouraged. Lifeguards
should contact the group leader and follow the information in Swim Group Log and Group
Notification Handout.

In addition, inform the group leader that this is a very unsafe act and that it violates the
American Camping Association Day Camp Accreditation Standards. Recommend they stay out of
the water by doing a dry land activity until lifeguards go on duty. Question their qualifications to
identify, prevent and perform a rescue. Question the rescue and first aid equipment they plan to use
in the event of an emergency. Let them know that it is important for you and your staff to finish the
equipment checks, morning training assignments, daily briefing and beach set up prior to opening.

If they insist on swimming, lifeguards should go on duty. In addition, immediately contact


the Aquatic Supervisor. The Aquatic Supervisor should contact their director.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/23/03


Last revised: 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 6 of 6
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Group Notification Process O-6.7

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/22/06


Last Revised: 2/22/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Group Notification Process O-6.7

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/22/06


Last Revised: 2/22/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Facility Rental O-6.8

Group Facility Rental

Groups occasionally rent a swim facility (Roberts, Diablo Foothills) or pay for extra lifeguard
service outside of normally scheduled hours. The process for this rental is handled by the Districts
Reservations unit.

The Aquatic Supervisor typically determines the number of lifeguards to be scheduled for the group.

Groups visiting on a rental basis are to receive the same briefing and adhere to the same facility rules
and safety guidelines as regular swim groups. See reference # O-6.6 Swim Groups for more
information.

A gate attendant from Operations is recommended in order to monitor facility capacity and ensure
that only those in the swim group are allowed into the facility.

Group sizes for picnic reservations may sometimes exceed facility capacity at the pool. The PIC
should work with the group leader and gate attendant to ensure that the pool capacity is not
exceeded. It is recommended that the group leaders develop some sort of rotation into and out of the
facility for their children and adult leaders. The Reservations unit will have informed the group of
the pool capacity while making the reservation. Lifeguards are encouraged to assist with this by
making announcements or calling swim breaks.

Often groups come to the facilities with a high energy level. Lifeguards should be cautious to
prevent the groups excitement to rush them through safety procedures.

Group leaders should be providing constant, effective supervision at all times. Lifeguards may need
to remind leaders of this responsibility.

Facility Rental Procedures

1. Set up a white board outside of the pool gate.

Include the following:


Welcome (Group Name)!
o Adult in Charge
Please have a head count of swimmers before your group enters the gate
At all times, you must have 1 adult chaperone for every 10 students inside the
facility
Please do not enter the facility without first speaking with the lifeguard staff.
o Students

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/25/08


Last revised 2/25/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Facility Rental O-6.8

You must listen to a safety talk before swimming.


THANK YOU!

2. PIC speak to group leaders


a. Locate the person in charge and gather the chaperones
b. Confirm the head count with the group leader
c. Review the hours of use, supervision policy, pool capacity, and how they can assist
with swimmer safety and supervision.
d. Ask if swimmers will be leaving the facility in a group or individually for a lunch
break or other activities.
e. Discuss procedures for entering the facility and how to ensure everyone hears the
safety talk.
f. Determine if there are any rules the leaders would like to include in the safety talk
(vending machine use, etc.)
g. Go over the group handout with the leader
h. Advise them of the swim break policy. Make sure the group has a swim break at least
every two hours

3. Entering the facility


a. Get assistance from the gate attendant if available
b. Have the leaders enter first
c. Students should enter one at a time
i. Make sure the number of students is within the 1:10 ratio of leaders already
inside
d. Close and secure the gate when the ratio is met

4. Safety talk
a. Direct the children to an appropriate site for the safety talk
b. Limit the group size to 50-75 students in order to minimize chaos and increase
efficacy). If the group size is larger than this divide the group into manageable units
and do consecutive or simultaneous talks.
c. If there are stragglers who have not hear the safety talk, have them wait by the gate
until a small group has gathered. Then have the break guard give them the safety talk.

5. Swim Test
a. Designate 1-2 lifeguards to administer the swim test. This may include the backer but
should not include the guards staffing chairs.
b. The swim test assignment may be an alternate station for the beginning of the
reservation.
c. Children who pass the swim test should have the appropriate wrist band placed on
their wrist.

6. After breaks where students/leaders leave the facility

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/25/08


Last revised 2/25/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Communications Facility Rental O-6.8

a. Do not let children back into the water without the correct ratio of leaders present.
i. It may be advisable to repeat the original entrance procedures
ii. Ideally this is handled by the gate attendant.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/25/08


Last revised 2/25/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Opening and Closing Season O-7.1

Season
Opening

At the beginning of each season, facilities will be ready for lifeguards to arrive at work and
initiate the days opening procedures. Sand, signs, chair rehabilitation, and lifeguarding equipment
should be rehabilitated, serviced, stocked and ready to go.

Ideally, only finishing, site specific, set up tasks will need to be completed in order to suit
staff preferences. However, site specific early season assignments should be expected and
completed.

The lifeguard station equipment, supplies and personal belongings will need to be arranged in
a neatly organized effective way soon after the season begins.

The Underwater Hazard Inspection will need to be completed as soon as possible at beaches
with non-chlorinated water. For more information see Reference # O-2.1 -- Record Keeping/Forms
Reports.

The Lifeguard Service Inventory should be completed, and the Aquatic Supervisor advised,
of any equipment needs as soon as possible.

Person in Charge

It is the responsibility of the Person in Charge to see that the above is carried out.

Closing

Before lifeguards leave for the season, the following Aquatic Facilities Check Out
Procedures form needs to be completed, along with any other site specific assignments.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/6/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
East Bay Regional Park District
Lifeguard Service
Aquatic Facility Check Out Procedures

Completed Pending Comments


Collect and review Facility Inventory:
Check for completeness and accuracy (especially equipment #s)
Clear up any questions resulting from review
Collect the following and note on Facility Inventory:
Lifeguard Operations Form Box
Lifeguard Employee Form Box
AED
Radios and Chargers (discharge radios)
Outboards
Lifeguard Service Manuals
In-Service Training Manual
PIC Binder
Anything that needs discarding or repairs at central storage areas
Inspect Facility for the following:
All Equip. stored safely (consider water damage, rodents, theft)
Collect all Paperwork (i.e. weekly reports, timecards, etc.)
Collect and recycle old Brochures, Postings, Calendars, etc.
Collect empty O2 Cylinders and replace with full ones if possible
Collect used Biohazard Bags for proper disposal
Check out and inventory LG Training Boxes
Check out and inventory Tool Box
Check out and repair Umbrellas
Check out and fix Rescue Boards
Check out and collect Board Holders (if necessary)
Check out and repair Manikins
Check out JG Equipment (stored neatly, good condition)
Check that Display Panels have good info
Lifeguards cleaned and secured Boat as needed
Check that Board Holders are properly stored
Check out Lifeguard Chairs for any repair issues
Check that LG Chairs and First Aid tables are properly stored
Cleanliness (including nothing left out for rodents)
Refrigerator unplugged, empty, clean, dry, doors left open
All Appliances unplugged
All Personal Belongings taken home
Lifeguard Station Phone unplugged and stored away
Lost and Found items turned over to park staff
Return Rented Water Coolers and Empty Bottles
Note the need for requests for repairs and maintenance
Completed Pending Comments
Collect Facility Keys:
Update Key Control Forms
Collect and review HGs End of Season Report:
Clear up any questions resulting from interview
Review HGs Performance Evaluation:
Provide copy to HG
Obtain HGs Signature
Park Supervisor Maintenance Responsibilities:
Shape the beach (if applicable)
Add additional sand when necessary and funded
Repair LG chairs/first aid table (paint, planks, rust, radio holders)
Take out buoys, ropes, markers, and store properly (if applicable)
Install, maintain, request signs
Any water weed issues to be addressed
Ropes properly stored
Any work requests
Any lifeguard station issues (i.e. flooding, vandalism, structural)
Anticipate ordering new ropes and buoys
Any health and safety code issues
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Opening/Closing Daily Procedures O-7.2

Daily Opening

Opening
When opening each day, lifeguards should follow a standard procedure in order to insure that
all duties are done on time and in a consistent manner. Security of lifeguard service equipment is an
important factor to consider when setting up the stations on the beach. Lifeguard equipment should
be kept in regular view by a lifeguard anytime there is public access to the beach.

Occasionally, during early hours of service there may be no one in the water, in these
instances a lifeguard should be stationed at the backer/first aid table monitoring facility activity.

At the end of the day, in facilities where swimming without lifeguards is prohibited,
lifeguards are to insure no one reenters the water after it is cleared for the day and prior to locking
the gates.

The morning opening procedure should follow these steps (Some site specific variations may
be necessary):
Unlock the facility
Disarm the alarm (If you are opening at an unusual time of day
advise Dispatch so they are aware of what is going on)
Sign in on the Lifeguard Sign In/Out Log
Turn on a portable radio and monitor for lifeguard traffic as
much as possible
Put away personal belongings
Change into your lifeguard uniform
Complete the equipment checks
Complete a facility safety check. Look over the facility in a
general way looking for vandalism or hazardous situations that
may have arisen over night.
Clean up the lifeguard station and facility as necessary
(according to maintenance duties)
Complete the morning briefing
Complete the days training program

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 10/1/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Opening/Closing Daily Procedures O-7.2

Set up the first aid station and lifeguard chairs


Set up the boat and bring it to the beach (if applicable)
Go in service by radio with Dispatch
Change the rule signs as necessary on the beach
Change and set up the A frame public education safety signs
as needed
Unlock the swim complex as necessary

Closing
The evening closing procedure should follow these steps:
Complete the evening maintenance requirements
Complete daily paperwork, including the Daily Closing log as applicable at
swim at own risk facilities. See reference number O-2.1 for more
information. (sample log below).
Change rule signs as necessary
Make the appropriate closing announcement (either lifeguards off duty or
closing the facility)
Advise Dispatch via radio that lifeguards are off duty
Put away/secure equipment
Perform a radio check which includes counting, placing in a charger and
turning off
Check the next days schedule
Check the Reservations swim group calendar
Sign out on the Lifeguard Sign In/Out Log
Arm the building alarm
Lock up the lifeguard station

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 10/1/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Opening/Closing Daily Procedures O-7.2

East Bay Regional Park District


Lifeguard Service
Facility:
Friday ending:
Daily Closing Log
Lifeguards must complete all closing procedures every day. LSM O-7.2

Sat Sun Mon Tues Wed Thru Fri

Confirm completion of each task by initialing each box

Make sure lifeguard signs are in


place: Warning no Lifeguard on
duty
Announce to all people on the beach
and in the water the Daily Closing
Announcement **

Go Out of Service with Dispatch

Contact the kiosk to display No


Lifeguard on duty sign

Secure lifeguard equipment and


station

**Daily Closing Announcement


May I have your attention please?
Lifeguards are now off duty
Parents please watch your children
Children 12 years old and under are not permitted in
the swimming area unless accompanied by a
responsible, actively supervising, individual of 16
years old or older
You may continue to swim at your own risk
Thank you and have a nice evening

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 10/1/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Opening/Closing LG Chair/1st Aid Set Up O-7.3

Lifeguard Chairs and First Aid Station Set Up

Head Chair Required Equipment -- In order to be fully operational the Head Chair
must be equipped with the following:
one channel 3 radio
two rescue tubes
two rescue boards (whenever possible)
one voice gun
one megaphone
umbrella, well anchored to chair

The First Aid Station Required Equipment:


one channel 3 radio assigned to the backer/first aid
lifeguard
Spine board
Medical Response Pack with Automatic External
Defibrillator (AED), adjacent to it
First aid kit
Metal clipboard
Hasty Search Bin
Grey Box
Shade structure
Water cooler

The other lifeguard chairs should have (some facilities may require additional equipment):
one channel 3 radio (if possible)
one rescue tube
one rescue board
one megaphone
umbrella, well anchored to chair

When setting up lifeguard chairs the rescue board should not be placed in the board holder
unless a lifeguard is up in the chair. If a lifeguard chair is waiting to be opened later in the day the
rescue board should be laying on the sand next to the lifeguard chair and board holder.

As much as is practical, keep equipment out of the sun and positioned in a way that
minimizes the chance of damage by falling or being knocked over.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/20/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Opening/Closing Daily Briefing O-7.4

Daily Briefing

The lifeguard daily briefing is designed to provide a forum for maintaining good
communications among the lifeguard staff. It covers important information regarding the day=s
operation. Areas that should be reviewed in the daily briefing when applicable include:

!Rotation order
!Rotation interval
!Lifeguard Zones
!Hazardous areas
!Scheduling issues
!Assignments
!Training plan for the day
!Personal safety check

Special attention needs to be paid to these items when visiting lifeguards are scheduled.

The rotation, PIC, interval, and tasks should be posted in the lifeguard station on the dry
erase board.

The personal safety check involves each lifeguard taking a few moments to prepare
themselves for the day. This includes insuring that their sunscreen is applied, their fanny pack is
stocked with at least a pair of protective gloves and pocket mask, their Hasty Search equipment is on
the beach and they are in their uniform with hat and sunglasses.

Each lifeguard is required to know the information covered in the morning briefing.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/1/05
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Opening and Closing Anza and Quarry Access O-7.5

Early and Late Beach Access for Quarry Lakes and Lake Anza
Following are guidelines for early/late beach access and swimming for both Quarry Lakes and Lake Anza.
Special guidelines are necessary at these facilities because they have lockable gates at their swim areas,
collect beach access fees, and allow swimming without lifeguard service.

Morning Access
Public will not be able to enter the swim complex from 9:15am -11:00am during the lifeguard season.

Public that has entered the swim facility prior to 9:15am and are fitness swimming may remain in the
facility free of charge until they have finished (This specifically does not apply to organized groups or
picnickers).

When lifeguards arrive in the morning they should ask unauthorized public to leave. The gates should be
secured after the last lifeguard has arrived at approximately 9:20am. (Dummy lock the gate at Quarry
Lakes if there are public in the facility so that public can exit. At Lake Anza, public can exit via the
turnstile.)

Further information
There is no ordinance prohibiting public from swimming during non-curfew hours (curfew is 10:00pm
5am) at both Quarry Lakes and Lake Anza when the gates are open. However, park staff will clear the
swim area and close the gates depending on their operational needs at anytime during the day or year.

Park staff will also base opening the gates for morning swim on their operational needs. For example, in
anticipation of a hot & busy day or a holiday, park staff will use their discretion to lock the gate late at
night or early in the morning to prevent early fitness swimming. This option should be used only when
there are unusual demands from the public for early fitness swimming. For more information on opening
and closing the gates, consult the Park Supervisor.

Swimmers are allowed to swim during non-lifeguard hours, non-curfew hours within the roped off
swimming area, year around at Quarry Lakes and during the period of March 16 October 31 at Lake
Anza.

Beach access fees are collected only when lifeguards are on duty.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4-4-06


Last Revised: 4-4-06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Opening/Closing Morning Roll Call O-7.6

Morning Roll Call

A morning roll call is conducted in order to help PICs develop the days work plan and
ensure clear communication with administrative staff.

The roll call will typically be conducted with the following procedure:

Each morning between 9:30am-10:00am the PIC should be prepared to check in with their
respective Aquatic Supervisor or Aquatic Assistant via telephone.

This period should be reserved for the PIC to make a plan for the day based on expected
conditions. Making a rotation, assigning tasks, and preparing for training are a few examples of
what should be completed during this time period.

The Aquatic Supervisor will call to confirm that all scheduled lifeguards have arrived at
work, review the days training and operational plan for the day, confirm group visits, clear up any
questions or needs, and follow up on assignments.

This is also the appropriate time for PICs to get approval to do alternate training topics and
alternate rotations.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/07


Last revised 4/1/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Special Events Procedures O-8.1

Procedures
Special events in the District are planned, coordinated and permitted through the District=s
Reservations department. The Aquatics department becomes involved when the event needs
lifeguard service.

In event planning meetings the Aquatic Manager and/or Aquatic Supervisor commit needed
lifeguard resources based upon event details. They also discuss pre-event plans and responsibilities.

The Aquatic Supervisor will advise the Lifeguard III of pertinent event details and give them
assignments.

Typical Lifeguard III duties

Prior to the event:


!Schedule lifeguards according to the event time line. (For more
information see Reference #O-1.8 -- Scheduling Special Events).
!Make rescue board and boat assignments
!Arrange for use of specific extra equipment from the Park Supervisor or Aquatic
Supervisor

On the day of the event:


!Set up lifeguard equipment
!Insure lifeguards are present, signed in and in uniform before the lifeguard
briefing.
!Help with course set up as needed.
!Help with the lifeguard briefing
!Assign and assist with clean up duties

Typical Shore Liaison duties

Prior to the event:


Plan for necessary equipment to be on site
Notify Lifeguard III of pre-event expectations

On the day of the event:


Identify whether conditions are acceptable for conducting the swim. The
liaison has the authority to stop the swim at any time.
Check in with the event organizer
Brief ambulance personnel on their role in an aquatic emergency
Review details in the Briefing Outline (Reference # O-8.2) with lifeguards
Maintain overall responsibility for lifeguard service at event

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/11/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Operations Briefing Outline O-8.2

Briefing Outline
Competitor Briefing

The competitor briefing should cover the following safety topics as well as any other
information that the organizer deems necessary:

lifeguard are provided for participant safety, follow their instructions


bright swim cap required
registered competitors only
swim un-assisted --- no hand paddles or fins (if applicable)
rescue boards and boats are not resting stations... rescued people are disqualified or not?
course explanation
if in trouble or need assistance wave arm for help
if unsure of your ability to complete the course dont participate
if uncomfortable with splashing and body contact, at the start, wait a few moments while the
initial pack leaves
if you drop our please notify lifeguard staff
any questions

Lifeguard Briefing

The following topics should be covered by the Aquatic Supervisor or designee in a lifeguard
briefing prior to each special event. The Event Director and Ambulance personnel should be invited
to attend. It is often advisable to loan a park radio to an ambulance attendant so they can monitor it
for emergency traffic.

Rescue Board Responsibilities


visual surveillance of swimmers
redirect swimmers to correct direction as necessary
watch for vertical position, weak strokes, swimmers signaling for assistance
awareness of big picture--- distribution of boards, response by other guards, possible need
for assistance
professional demeanor at all times, no chatter, ready position on boards
rescue/ assist swimmers as necessary
move victims to outside or inside of course for boat pick up and return to shore in the event
of a submerging swimmer, as necessary, dive off rescue board to recover
if recovery is not possible, remain stationary, take cross bearing sightings on points on
shore for location, signal to boat with submerged swimmer signal for assistance
provide patient care as necessary
use board as platform for loading victim into boat

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/11/03


Last Revised: 3/11/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Operations Briefing Outline O-8.2

Hasty Search Diver Responsibilities


as designated in lifeguard briefing, insure personal hasty search equipment in loaded in boat
respond to last seen point when notified of possible submerged swimmer
participate in pattern dive as indicated by IC

Boat Responsibilities
visual surveillance of swimmers / awareness of big picture
rescue assist swimmers as necessary
keep boards evenly distributed as necessary
respond to signal for swimmer pick-up either inside or outside course--- avoid crossing
course of swimmers
work closely with the deck hand in insuring the boat doesnt get too close to swimmers
assist loading swimmers into boat, provide medical as necessary, transport swimmers to
designated unloading area at shore
communicate with shore as necessary
respond to lifeguard signal as appropriate for submerged swimmer and deploy marker buoy
ASAP
respond to submersion as appropriate, with equipment, while designated hasty search divers
are deployed to scene

Shore Responsibilities
provide liaison with event officials and EMS personnel
evaluate conditions for swim go/no-go determination
give competitor briefing as necessary
give lifeguard briefing , designate hasty search divers (approximately of lifeguards on
boards)
communicate with boats and park personnel as necessary. Be aware of big picture and
provide direction from shore as appropriate
receive swimmers from boats or boards, document rescues, assists, medicals as necessary
stop swim as necessary
provide medical care as necessary
coordinate EMS activation and dive as necessary
provide direct ambulance contact if necessary
initiate incident command as necessary
prepare post event reports as necessary
collect equipment as necessary

General Event Details


professional demeanor
clean-up, equipment back in service, return to scheduled assignment without delay
no contact with event officials for t-shirt requests etc.
personnel assignments, boards, kayaks, boats, shore, designate primary hasty search divers
responsibility for course set up and clean-up
responsibility for equipment
East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/11/03
Last Revised: 3/11/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Operations Operations Briefing Outline O-8.2

swim course description


start time, briefing start time
course distance and direction of swim
number of competitors and expectations of skill levels
restrictions on competitors
environmental hazards
remind staff about cross reference marks for witnessed submersions and hand signals
review depth and bottom conditions over course

Equipment
Rescue Boards
o talk about radios as appropriate
o rescue tubes as appropriate
Kayaks
Boats
o rescue tube
o PFDs
o marker buoy
o hasty search bags for each initial hasty search diver
o portable radio
o talk about radio as appropriate
o wool blanket
o voice gun
o binoculars
Shore
o portable radio
o talk about radio as appropriate
o medical pack
o voice gun
o documentation capability (clipboard w/ forms)
o scuba equipment; 2 sets, search line bag (in shore liaison van)
o binoculars

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/11/03


Last Revised: 3/11/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 3
Safety
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Station Duties Chair Stations S-1.1

Stations
Lifeguards will rotate between various stations throughout the typical work day. It is
important that each lifeguard understands their responsibilities at each station. Reliable efforts from
each station are crucial to the teamwork required for effective operations.

Chair Stations

Locations:
Lifeguard chairs are positioned to maintain reasonable zones for water surveillance and to
facilitate acceptable response times to water emergencies. The target time from any chair to the
furthest distance in a zone is 30 seconds (this time may vary due to crowds, facility design, water
level, etc). The Head Chair serves as a focal point for Lifeguard Service Operations and is centrally
located within the swim facility. Each chair is progressively numbered left to right as you look at
the water from the middle of the swimming area. Chair numbers start with number one.

Primary Responsibility
Lifeguards at the chair stations are primarily responsible for water surveillance of the zone
assigned to their chair, taking preventive actions and responding to swimmers in need. They must
remain alert at all times and provide vigilant water coverage through scanning.

Avoid Boredom and Distractions


To prevent boredom and promote attentiveness, lifeguards should change scanning
techniques and body position every five minutes. (For more information see Reference #S-2.2
Scanning). Distractions to water surveillance must be diligently avoided. Lifeguards must learn to
continually scan their water while answering radio traffic, directing the public and communicating
with other lifeguards (including the backer). Any interruption to the scan that cannot be quickly
corrected, should be passed on to the backer. Refrain from unnecessary activities such as eating,
sunscreen application and extended conversations with staff or the public. Remember to avoid
making eye contact during brief conversations, you can explain to the public that you are listening
but cannot take your eyes away from your surveillance duties.

Lifeguards assigned to supervise an aquatic area shall not be subject to duties that would
distract or intrude their attention from proper observation of persons in the waterfront area, or that
prevent immediate assistance to persons in distress in the water. Specifically, lifeguards assigned to
water surveillance shall not be assigned any duties other than public safety.

Maintain Posture
While in the chair it is important to maintain posture that conveys alertness and readiness.
Such posture requires the lifeguard to sit or stand upright with eyes directed toward the water, and to
maintain head movement for effective scanning. There should be a significant change in posture
every five minutes in order to help maintain attentiveness (For more information see Reference # S-
East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98
Last revised 2/25/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Station Duties Chair Stations S-1.1

2.2 Scanning). Slouching, reclining and looking away from the water are to be avoided as they erode
public trust and slow response times. Sitting or standing on rescue tubes, or other safety equipment,
must also be avoided so that all equipment is constantly ready for emergency use.

Use The Backer


The backer is there to assist the lifeguards assigned to zone coverage. They play a crucial role in
providing quality public service. The backer should be used in making difficult calls and presenting
information to the public. The public will be much more receptive to rule advisements presented by
a backer, face to face, than if yelled at from a lifeguard in a chair. When a lifeguard must vacate a
chair to make a rescue, it is critical that they yell backer! This alerts the backer that their
assistance is immediately needed, often to replace the vacated chair in the event of a rescue. The call
also signals the lifeguards in adjacent chairs to cover the vacant zone until the backer is in place. For
more information see Reference # S-1.2 Backer.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/25/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Station Duties Backer S-1.2

Backer Stations
Locations
Typically there is one assigned backer station located near the Head Chair. Occasionally,
additional backers may be necessary and stationed near other lifeguard chairs. When sitting, the
backer must use the designated white backer chair or the first aid station table, located near the Head
Chair. Backers should remain near their stations when not responding to a call. If backer is needed
to handle a situation that may result in a long response to a call, then the lifeguards in the chairs
should be informed and, if possible, a replacement backer should be summoned. If no replacement
backer is available, then attempts should be made to maintain a means of communication (i.e.
portable radio) between the backer and the lifeguards in the chairs.

Primary Responsibility
Backers are primarily responsible for providing assistance to the lifeguards in the chairs.
They must remain attentive and respond to any backer calls. Backers are ready resources for the
lifeguards in the chairs to use in assisting with preventive actions and public contacts, both in the
water and on the beach.

The backer should not leave their station until relieved by another lifeguard in the rotation.

Face the Water


Although they are not directly responsible for providing water surveillance to any zone of
water, backers should position themselves so that they face the water as much as possible. This
strategy is designed to increase the potential for them to notice a water emergency.

Take Initiative
It is important for the backer to take initiative in providing support for the lifeguards in the
chair. A good backer can often anticipate the needs of the lifeguards in the chairs and take action
before it is requested. Intercepting questions and requests from the public, and providing first aid,
rule enforcement and administering swim tests are common tasks for backers. The more helpful you
can be as a backer, the less distractions the lifeguards in the chairs will have to deal with. It is
important to be an active backer.

Dont Be a Distraction
As a backer, be careful not to become a distraction for the lifeguards in the chairs. Although
it is critical for chair lifeguards and backers to communicate regularly and effectively, exchanges
should be brief and to the point. When talking to the lifeguards in the chairs, position yourself
directly behind or to the side of their chair whenever possible. This allows you to face the water and
makes it easier for the chair lifeguard to continue, undistracted, with their water surveillance.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date:4/1/98


Last revised 3/11/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Station Duties First Aid S-1.3

First Aid Station


Location
The first aid station is typically located near the Head Chair. On crowded days, and when
staffing levels allow, it may be a separate station within the rotation, but more often it is combined
with the backer station.

Primary Responsibility
Lifeguards at the first aid station are responsible for providing medical attention to those in
need and completing the appropriate documentation.

A lifeguard should be at the first aid station monitoring beach activity during all on-duty
hours whether there are swimmers in the water or not. If water activity begins, chair stations need to
be staffed.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/22/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Station Duties Alternate Stations S-1.4

Alternate Stations
On crowded days, when staffing levels permit, alternate stations to a typical days rotation
are recommended. These alternate stations do not take away from the responsibilities of the other
stations; rather they can provide much needed assistance and extra coverage. These alternate stations
are designed to give PICs more tools for protecting swimmers.

Beach and Zone Patrol


Beach patrols are extremely helpful when the bather load is concentrated along the shoreline
and shallow water. Lifeguards assigned to beach patrol will patrol the shoreline and shallow water
by foot, assisting the lifeguards in the chairs. They will basically act as a roaming lifeguard,
making public contacts for rule enforcement and preventive actions as necessary. They are not
assigned to a chairs geographic zone.

A modification of the beach patrol is the zone patrol. This position has the same duties as
the beach patrol or board patrol but is assigned to a particular lifeguard chairs geographic zone,
rather than the whole beach/swimming area.

It is important for the lifeguard on beach or zone patrol to carry a rescue tube or can to assist
in identifying them in a crowd as well as in making a rescue. Lifeguards with beach or zone patrol
assignments are not to leave their assigned station until relieved by replacement lifeguard. See
reference # S-1.6 Rotation for more information on information and surveillance responsibility
exchange.

Board Patrol
Board patrols are most useful when there is a dense shallow water crowd, an abundance of
deep water swimmers or a strong glare (from the rising or setting sun) for the lifeguards in the chairs
to contend with. Lifeguards assigned to board patrol will station themselves on a rescue board in
deep water toward the back of the swim area. From this vantage point they can face the beach and
provide additional coverage with minimal response time to deep water areas. They are expected to
roam the swim area, or their zone, providing rule enforcement, taking preventive actions and making
rescues. Lifeguards with board patrol assignments are not to leave their assigned station until they
see that their relief is waiting and ready for the transition on shore, this transition can also be
accomplished in the water by the relieving lifeguard swimming or paddling out to the lifeguard on
board patrol.

Board patrols may also be accomplished by a kayak when appropriate.

Doubling a Chair
Putting two people in a lifeguard chair can be an effective way to lifeguard a densely packed
swimming area. It is important for the lifeguards up to communicate how zone coverage will be
accomplished. In most cases, the zone is split with more overlap in the middle than is typical to

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Station Duties Alternate Stations S-1.4

overlap between chairs. More of the zone has double coverage. Typically a board or beach patrol
will be in effect prior to doubling a chair. Lifeguards should be cautious not to be a distraction to one
another in this alternate station.

PIC
The PIC will determine which alternate stations are implemented during the rotation. Crowd
and beach dynamics effect which alternate stations will be most effective in preventing water
accidents. All lifeguards have the responsibility to suggest implementing an alternate station when
they believe it is appropriate.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Station Duties Break Station S-1.5

Break Station
Purpose
It is essential that lifeguards have the opportunity to rest both mentally and physically.
Regularly scheduled breaks prevent fatigue and allow the lifeguard to remain alert and effective.

Location
Lifeguards are expected to take their breaks away from the swim area whenever possible (i.e.
Lifeguard Stations). This allows a chance to get out of the sun and away from the crowds to achieve
a quality rest. This also prevents the appearance of lifeguards being lazy in the eyes of the public.
Due to the lifeguards continual obligation to be on call to respond to emergencies, it is
imperative that they maintain communication capabilities with lifeguards at other stations. This can
be accomplished by maintaining visual contact with the swim area, or by audible contact via portable
radio.

Minimum Breaks
When a twenty-minute interval is chosen, there will be a minimum of one break period for
every hour and forty minutes in a non-break station. When a thirty-minute interval is chosen, there
will be a minimum of one break period for every two hours in a non-break station. It is important to
break up the rotation as much as possible between consecutive chair stations due to the mental strain
of scanning. Having the opportunity to change the focus from scanning to other activities can help
maintain vigilance.

In order to meet these minimum break standards on crowded days with numerous stations
open, it will often be necessary to rotate in pairs. When there is an odd number of staff, and rotating
in pairs is necessary, it is appropriate for the Person in Charge to remove themselves from the
rotation to supervise and assist where needed. Occasionally, public safety demands may supersede
breaks (i.e. missing person searches, crowd management, major medicals, etc...).

It is crucial that lifeguards advise the Person in Charge anytime they feel they need a break in
order to maintain effectiveness in the chair.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 10/1/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Station Duties Rotation S-1.6

Rotation
Interval
In an effort to remain alert, maintain effectiveness and prevent mental and physical fatigue;
lifeguards will rotate among stations on a regular basis. The simple act of moving from one station
to another provides a valuable mental and physical break in itself. This short transition time allows
the lifeguard to change body positions and rest their eyes, and mind, from scanning.

The Person in Charge will determine the rotation interval, either twenty or thirty minutes,
with primary consideration given to the total number of stations within the rotation and what is
allowed in the Rotation Guidelines of Reference # O-1.2. The interval will make certain that no
lifeguard spends more than two hours without a break.

Order of Rotation
The order of rotation will vary among facilities and will often change throughout the day.
The main factors to be considered when determining the order of rotation are crowd dynamics and
staffing levels and experience.

Research has shown that changing activities frequently can improve vigilance. It is therefore
important to minimize consecutive chair stations.

To achieve this goal, break, backer, first aid and alternate stations should be alternated with
chair stations whenever possible. In general, a chair station should be preceded by a break station.
An acceptable alternative to this guideline is to allow two consecutive break stations when
conducting a twenty-minute rotation interval.

Lifeguard experience levels should also be taken into consideration. Less experienced
lifeguards should be alternated between experienced ones whenever possible. This is especially
important for first year lifeguards.

The lifeguard on break, or backing lifeguard when necessary (the backing lifeguard needs to
remember to wait and only initiate the rotation once a reliving lifeguard has arrived and been
briefed), will initiate the rotation at the appropriate time. Rotation direction should follow the
direction that chairs are numbered (i.e break, chair #1, backer, chair #2, break, chair #3). It is
important to maintain consistency in regards to a timely rotation. Failure to rotate on time can strain
relationships with co-workers and shorten break intervals so must be avoided.

Variations
The rotation will need to be altered on occasion to meet the needs of the current situation.
Changes in staffing levels and crowd dynamics (i.e. size, activity, location, etc.) are common causes

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Station Duties Rotation S-1.6

for changes to the rotation, as well as emergencies (i.e. medicals, missing persons, rescues, etc.).
When it is necessary to alter the rotation, it is important that public safety demands are given top
priority and that all lifeguards are informed of the changes. Remember to update the changes made
to the rotation on the dry erase board, this should be done live-time and can be delegated to staff on
break if not possible by the PIC.

Variations outside the Rotation Guidelines of Reference # O-1.2 should receive Aquatic
Supervisor approval, except in emergency situations.

Rotation Guideline Summary


1. Avoid consecutive chair stations when possible
2. Rotations are on either 20 or 30 minute intervals
3. Chair stations should be preceded by a break when possible
4. Breaks can be consecutive only if the above are met and the rotation is on 20
minutes
5. When there is only one break station in the rotation, follow LSM O-1.2 Rotation
Guidelines
6. When running a split alpha/bravo rotation, each rotation should meet these
guidelines

Changing Stations
When changing stations with another lifeguard it is important that it be done properly. The
lifeguard initiating the rotation should receive a verbal briefing, on the situation and potential
problems relative to that station, from the departing lifeguard. The departing lifeguard does not
relinquish their duties until the receiving lifeguard verbally acknowledges their acceptance of them,
this includes alternate stations and the backer station. Continuous water surveillance must be
maintained during the rotation.

This procedure is especially important when rotating between chair stations to prevent the
premature assumption that the zone is covered by the receiving lifeguard. The receiving lifeguard
should enter from the back of the chair by climbing up the ladder. This prevents the possibility of
obstructing the chair lifeguards view or response path. After entering the chair, the receiving
lifeguard should set up the equipment according to their preferences (i.e. umbrella, fanny pack, voice
gun, etc.). The receiving lifeguard then inquires about the zone and the departing lifeguard provides
a detailed briefing. The briefing should cover all problems and concerns related to that zone; such
as, identification of weak swimmers, hazards, poorly supervised children, previously advised or
warned individuals and any other pertinent information. Once the briefing is delivered, and all
questions are cleared up, the receiving lifeguard must verbally acknowledge I got it to signify that
they are now responsible for the zone and that the departing lifeguard can now exit down the back of
the chair. The chair transition should not typically take more than two minutes or so.

If its necessary for the backer to initiate a rotation they should transfer care of the park radio
to the Head Chair lifeguard (This may often be their next station). The incoming backer can then

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Station Duties Rotation S-1.6

retrieve the radio from there. This action is necessary to avoid leaving the radio unattended at the
backer station.

Use of RFDs
At every station it is required that each lifeguard have immediate access to a Rescue Floatation
Device (i.e. rescue board, tube or can). Lifeguards must be ready to respond to water emergencies at
any time and RFDs are critical to personal and public safety. This policy applies while making
public contacts throughout the swim facility and while in transition between chairs. This means that
each lifeguard will wear the strap and carry a rescue tube or can in a ready position unless stationed
at a chair, on a board or on break. This policy provides the added benefit of easy recognition of
lifeguards for the public and fellow staff.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Water Surveillance Zones S-2.1

Zone Coverage
Defined
Zone coverage is a systematic way to divide an established body of water among multiple
lifeguards. The swim area is divided into a number of zones equal to the number of lifeguards
assigned to chair stations. Each zone is predetermined and overlaps with adjacent zones to ensure
that all water is well covered.

It is important to remember that a lifeguards visual coverage and responsibility to swimmers


does not end at the edge of their zone but does decrease as they get out of their primary zone.
Swimmer safety is a team effort.

Know Your Zone


Zones may change throughout the day, in number and size, as chair stations are added or
closed in the rotation. It is the individual lifeguards responsibility to be aware of which chairs are
open or closed, and to know their zone prior to taking responsibility for the station. Special attention
should be given to new and visiting lifeguards, during morning briefing, to resolve any doubts
regarding zone responsibilities for each chair. It is equally critical that a chair station is never
closed without the knowledge and approval of the Person in Charge, and the lifeguards whose zones
will change as a result. This must be accomplished verbally, or through hand signals, before the
chair station is closed.

Open Water Lifesaving, The United States Lifesaving Association Manual, gives a good
summation of zone overlap. It states, A standard principle of overlap for a contiguous beach area
with several towers is that each lifeguard is made responsible for the water area to the next staffed
lifeguard station on either side. In this way, the lifeguards in each tower are equally responsible for
the water area between them.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 3/26/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Water Surveillance Scanning S-2.2

Scanning
Defined
Scanning is a systematic way to visually survey the water in a given zone. The lifeguard
visually scans through their zone in a repetitive pattern making sure that no area is missed. While
scanning over the water, the lifeguard focuses briefly on each swimmer or groups of swimmers and
evaluates their activity. Where the bottom is visible, it should be scanned and lifeguards should
immediately investigate shadows or unknown shapes on the bottom. If the lifeguard detects a sign of
distress or unsafe behavior, they provide further assessment and take appropriate action. If they see
no signs of distress, they continue scanning across their zone. Effective scanning is a critical part of
a lifeguards job.

Strategies
A great deal of training and experience goes into learning to effectively scan a zone of water.
Following are a few strategies that may be helpful.

It is important that lifeguards avoid tunnel vision (focusing on only one swimmer or group
of swimmers). Lifeguards should remain aware of whats happening in their peripheral vision. This
visual sense is helpful in picking up changes in activity patterns that may be indicative of signs of
distress.

Lifeguards should also avoid zoning out (failing to focus and evaluate what is being seen
as the zone is scanned). There are several techniques that lifeguards should employ to help them stay
physically and mentally alert while scanning.

1. Move your head as you scan and change focus areas.


2. Significantly change body posture every five minutes. Lifeguards should not sit for
more than 5 minutes in a row.
3. Change scanning pattern each time you significantly change body posture.
4. There should be a beginning and end to each scan. Each scan should end with a
downward head sweep looking just in front of and below the guard stand.
5. Watch facial expressions of people in your water that indicate fear or concern.
6. Maintain a mental attitude of defending your zone from hazardous activities
assertively and quickly take care of preventive actions.
7. Mentally rehearse rescues for difficult people in your zone when lower water activity
allows.
8. Mentally anticipate group or individual movement and activity in your zone.
9. Count or estimate people in your zone at each scanning pattern change when lower
water activity allows..
10. Dont assume low water activity allows you to lower your attentiveness.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/17/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Water Surveillance Scanning S-2.2

11. Establish a pattern for your scan; horizontal, vertical, arcs,. Be sure no part of your
zone is missed during a scan.
12. Employ mental activities around water activity during slow times: guess peoples
ages, heights, weights, cluster people into groups, focus on a unique person in each
group.
13. Employ a 20-minute rotation.
14. Do a physical activity during breaks to increase respiration and heart rate.
15. Implement hot day strategies (see below).

Many scanning techniques exist, and lifeguards are encouraged to try different methods and
decide which ones they feel most comfortable with.

Because drowning can occur quickly and without warning, it is critical that the chosen
scanning technique allows the lifeguard to scan their entire zone in 20 seconds or less.

Hot Day Strategies

High temperatures can have a negative effect on vigilance. This has an especially negative
effect because as temperatures rise attendance typically does too. Studies have found that when
temperatures rose above 84 degrees Fahrenheit, performance lagged dramatically. In order to help
ward off the effects of high temperature, the following steps should be taken.

1. Remain in the shade as much as possible.


2. Increase your intake of cold water.
3. Get wet during the rotation.
4. Use wet cloths or similar items to promote cooling while in the chair.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 2/17/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Water Surveillance Deployment S-2.3

Deployment

Goal
Proper deployment of lifeguards is important to ensure efficient use of these valuable resources.
Deployment decisions must always be made with the goal of providing adequate safety to the public. To
attain this goal, deployment decisions must be continually reviewed to account for changes in crowd
dynamics and lifeguard availability.

The Rotation Guidelines given in Reference # O-1.2 Facility Schedules should be followed
unless there are unusual circumstances that make the guidelines impractical. Consult the Aquatic
Supervisor for permission to implement variations.

The following is given as background information to lifeguards. This information was


considered in developing the Rotation Guidelines.

First Priority: Water Coverage


First priority is to provide adequate water coverage with the lifeguard resource. Typically each
chair will be staffed before a lifeguard is assigned to go on beach or board patrol. Beach and board
patrols are especially useful for conducting preventive actions because the lifeguard is able to make
personal contact with swimmers. During the patrol, the lifeguard is also closer to patrons in the event
they need assistance. Double staffing a chair may be useful when a zone is highly impacted with
swimmers; providing another set of eyes from the vantage point of the elevated chair.

Because the Person in Charge will often be busy, and because each lifeguard may have a
different comfort zone, it is each lifeguards responsibility to request additional coverage before their
zone becomes unmanageable. This may be a time to vary the Rotation Guidelines.

When crowds are minimal reduce the swim area size to make water coverage more manageable
and reduce staffing levels as appropriate. Insure that if there is an open zone, its corresponding chair is
open.

Due to the size of Roberts and Diablo Foothills swimming area and water visibility, if there are
20 people or less in the water, one of the lifeguard chairs may be closed while keeping the entire
swimming area open. The staffed chair should optimize swimmer coverage. On-duty staff should be
reduced as appropriate.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 11/13/08/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Water Surveillance Deployment S-2.3

While swimming lesson and junior lifeguard program participants are in the water, there will be
one lifeguard assigned to surveillance duties for the programs zone of water in the following ratio. One
lifeguard will be assigned for every 25 children in swimming lessons and 40 children for junior guards.

Second Priority: Back up and First Aid


Once water coverage is attained, the next available staff should be assigned to the backer station.
Typically there will be one backer and they will also be responsible for staffing the first aid station.
When staffing is available and the need exists, then consideration should be given to staffing additional
backers at the backer/first aid station.

Third Priority: Alternative Duties


There are times, especially early in the day, when staffing needs have been overestimated but are
expected to increase later in the day. This provides an opportunity to accomplish important tasks that
would otherwise be delayed. On these occasions it is appropriate for staff to work on additional
maintenance, training or administrative tasks pertinent to Lifeguard Services. It is not a time to interact
with the Junior Lifeguard program. For more information see Reference # A-7.5 JG Interactions. Misuse
of this valuable time is inappropriate and can be cause for discipline. A change in the rotation guidelines
requires Aquatic Supervisor approval.

Person in Charge
It is your responsibility to see that deployment priorities are met. Subjectivity does exist here and you
will be required to use good judgment. If ever in doubt, follow the Rotation Guidelines, or error on the
side of increased public safety. Discuss the situation with your Aquatic Supervisor if you feel a better
use of resources is possible.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/98


Last revised 11/13/08/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Water Surveillance Rescue Drill S-2.4

Rescue Drills
An effective rescue requires a coordinated team effort to ensure the safety of the victim,
rescuer and other swimmers. Rescue drills are a tool for assessing a lifeguards ability to recognize
an active drowning victim and take appropriate action in performing a rescue. The drills are also
intended to practice emergency rescue procedures and provide our patrons with some understanding
of our training and how these emergencies are handled.

Procedures

A. Rescue drills are conducted during lifeguard service hours and are considered an element of
our skill audit program.

B. A drill victim will be designated by the Aquatic Manager, Aquatic Supervisor, or Aquatic
Assistant (Aquatic Staff). Each drill victim will be briefed on the general purpose of the drill
and their expected conduct. Drill victims should be unknown to the on-site lifeguard staff.

C. The specific location and time of each drill will be planned to avoid unnecessary conflicts
with swim facility programs and activities.

D. An Observer will be responsible for ensuring that adequate water surveillance is provided
throughout the drill. The Aquatic Staff member evaluating the drill may serve as the
Observer, or if conditions indicate, a lifeguard may provide this function.

E. Each lifeguard involved in the drill will complete a Feedback Form. The form should be
completed within 24 hours and turned into the Head Lifeguard/PIC. The Head Lifeguard will
submit the Feedback Form to the appropriate Aquatic staff.

Evaluation

F. Each rescue drill will be evaluated by at least one Aquatic Staff member. They will primarily
evaluate lifeguard performance in the two initial elements that every rescue has; recognition
and response.

G. Evaluation will also involve lifeguard readiness. Elements of these criteria are attentive
posture, scanning head movement, equipment readiness, sun protection, and rule enforcement.

H. A rescue, by its very nature, requires quick identification, evaluation, decision, and action on
the part of a lifeguard. These elements are part of the drill evaluation.

I. Each drill and its Feedback Forms will be evaluated by Aquatic Staff and the results
discussed with the appropriate lifeguards.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/07


Last revised 4/1/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Water Surveillance Rescue Drill S-2.4

J. The Aquatic Staff member who conducts the drill will oversee and evaluate it. Evaluation will
include an on-site verbal operational critique of the drill and completion of the Rescue Drill
Evaluation Form.

K. The lifeguard(s) up are evaluated according to the time it takes to recognize the victim and
initiate the rescue emergency action plan (See LSM Reference # E-3.1 Rescues for more
information). The other lifeguards are evaluated according to their recognition of the rescue
notification (backer call).

L. Lifeguard response is evaluated according to its adherence to the rescue emergency action
plan. The rescuing lifeguard should contact and control the victim in an effective manner.
The other lifeguards should maintain continuous surveillance of the rescue and entire
swimming area throughout the drill.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/07


Last revised 4/1/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Water Surveillance Recognition Readiness Drill S-2.5

Recognition Readiness Drills


The Recognition Readiness Drill is a tool designed to measure a lifeguards effectiveness in
scanning a zone of water. It is use to determine the scanning ability and vigilance of the on-duty
lifeguard.

Procedures

Recognition Readiness drills are conducted during lifeguard service hours and are
considered an element of our skill audit program.

The time of the drill will be designated by the Aquatic Manager, Aquatic Supervisor, or
Aquatic Assistant (Aquatic Staff), facility Lifeguard III, or Lifeguard II.

The drill will take place within the swim area of the facility. The specific location will be
determined by the Initiator.

The Initiator will be responsible for ensuring that adequate water surveillance is provided
throughout the drill.

The Initiator will complete the Recognition Readiness Drill form. The form should be
completed immediately after the drill. The Lifeguard III/II will submit the Recognition
Readiness Drill form with the weekly paperwork.

Only one Recognition Readiness Drill can be conducted by the Lifeguard III/II per day.
Aquatic Staff may initiate additional Recognition Readiness drills as needed.

Evaluation

Each drill will be evaluated by at least one Lifeguard III/II or Aquatic Staff member.
They will primarily evaluate lifeguard performance in scanning: quick identification and
feedback will be discussed with the appropriate lifeguard.

The Lifeguard III/II or Aquatic Staff member who conducts the drill will oversee and
evaluate it. Evaluation will include an on-site verbal operational critique of the drill along
with completion of the Recognition Readiness Drill. form.

The lifeguard(s) up are evaluated according to the time it takes to recognize the victim.
(See LSM Reference # S-2.2 Scanning for more information).

The other lifeguards should maintain continuous surveillance of the rescue and entire
swimming area throughout the drill.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/10/08


Last revised 3/10/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Water Surveillance Recognition Readiness Drill S-2.5

East Bay Regional Park District


Facility:
Lifeguard Service Friday
Recognition Readiness Ending:
Drill
LGI
Estimated
Time to II/II
Swim Area Time of attendance
Date Name of Lifeguard Location day at time of
recognize Feedback given s
(seconds) Initi
drill
als

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/10/08


Last revised 3/10/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Swim Tests S-3.1

Swim Tests

Purpose
One of the most common preventive actions a lifeguard makes is limiting apparently poor
swimmers to chest deep water. The swim test provides the lifeguard a consistent way to determine a
patrons swimming ability. Only those swimmers who demonstrate the ability to safely negotiate
deep water should be allowed to go there.

Test Method
The swim test should be given in waist to chest deep water. Usually the back up lifeguard
administers the test so that the lifeguard up in the chair is not distracted. The lifeguard should clearly
explain what they are looking for on the swim test. This should include the beginning and ending
location, what stroke is to be used and what to do if they cant complete the test. Some general
guidelines for assessing swimming ability include the swimmer being sufficiently horizontal to have
a propelling kick that breaks the surface of the water, and having an over-arm stroke where the arms
clear the water entirely with every stroke. Upon completion the patron must clearly understand
whether theyve passed the test or not. If they did not pass the test, give them some encouragement
to keep practicing but make it clear that they must go no deeper than chest deep water. It is a good
idea to make sure their parent or guardian knows of this limitation and to take the opportunity to
remind them about swim lessons and the lifejacket loaner programs we offer. Lifeguards should also
reiterate the need for the parent to closely supervise their child. The swim test wrist band should be
placed on those swimmers who pass the test at Roberts, Cull Canyon, Contra Loma and Diablo
Foothills (pilot program). Lifeguards should watch those with wrist bands just as closely as everyone
else.

In general, the swim test should involve a continuous 20-yard swim using front crawl. The
exact swim test distance may vary from facility to facility but should be consistent at each facility.
Ultimately it is up to the lifeguards judgment on whether or not a patron has the swimming ability
to safely venture past chest deep water.

Roberts Pool and Diablo Foothills


The swim test at Roberts Pool and Diablo Foothills should be given on the shallow side, and
adjacent to, the deep-water rope. It involves swimming from the starting location, across the pools
width, and back. There should be no resting at the far wall. The patron is then required to tread water
for one minute.

Swim Tests to Day Camp Groups


Sometimes the most efficient way to conduct a swim test for day camp groups is to do it
immediately following the safety lecture. Children interested in going into deep water should be
brought to the swim test area together. Swim test instructions can be given to the group; however,
each swim test should be administered to one person at a time. The camp leader who is responsible
for the child should be present during the test and informed of the results.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/27/03


Last revised 12/15/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Swim Tests S-3.1

Junior Lifeguard Program


Each Junior Lifeguard candidate must pass a swim test prior to participating in the program.
Each child must demonstrate their ability to tread water and swim continuously for 25 yards. Having
this ability is necessary for the participants safety and enjoyment of the program. The childs
guardian should be present during this prerequisite test. More information on conducting this test is
given during Junior Lifeguard Instructor training sessions.
Junior Lifeguard candidates may also take the swim test before the first day of the session at any
of the facilities. There is a specific form to be filled out, which can be found in the facility form box.
Lifeguards administering the swim test must make sure to sign the form.

The Junior Lifeguard will take the form with them to the first day of their session and will not
have to take the swim test again. The test consists of swimming 25 yards with a proficient over arm
stroke and treading water for 30 seconds. If they do not pass the swim test they should be encouraged to
continue practicing and to come back another time to try again.

Below is the form to be filled out and signed after the JG has successfully passed their test.

East Bay Regional Park District

Junior Lifeguard Swim Test


This paper verifies that _______________ has taken and
(Participants Name)

successfully passed a 25 yard swim test and treaded water


for 30 seconds.
The test was completed at _____________on the date of / / .
(Facility)

Lifeguards Signature: _______________________________

Parents Signature: __________________________________


(month/day/year)

**Congratulations! Please turn this completed sheet in to your Instructor(s) on


the first day of your session.**

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 1/27/03


Last revised 12/15/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Visitor Rules and Regulations S-3.2

Visitor Rules and Regulations

Preventive Actions
One of the lifeguards primary jobs is to recognize a hazardous situation exists, or is
developing, and to take action to mitigate the harmful outcome. This is commonly known as
making a prevent. It is also, to a great degree, what separates the job a lifeguard does from that of
other emergency service personnel. Police, fire and ambulance services primarily respond to
emergencies when notified by others. On the water, distressed swimmers can become submersions
too quickly for lifeguards to be dispatched to the scene by others.

It takes training, experience and vigilance over the water in order for a lifeguard to be able to
distinguish between distressed or drowning swimmers among a crowd of people engaging in safe
recreational activity. And, while there are some common signs lifeguards look for in trying to detect
swimmers in trouble, situations arise in which there is no outward detectable indication of distress
before submersion. In these situations there is little, if any, preventive action a lifeguard can take to
avoid the incident.

Secondary to the water, lifeguards are also responsible for a safe beach and surrounding
recreational area. Doing our best to insure a safe enjoyable visit by all park visitors is a responsibility
of every District employee. Taking preventive actions to get glass containers removed or to cordon
off hazardous areas are two common examples of non-water based prevents.

There are many park management methods used by the District to reduce the risk of
drowning and accidents at lifeguarded facilities. Signs, rules, regulations, ordinances, facility design,
maintenance and inspections, staff training, equipment, policies and procedures are some examples.
All of these methods rely on conscientious lifeguards doing their jobs to be effective.

VISITOR RULES AND REGULATIONS

Beach and Swim Regulation rule signs are posted in prominent areas of each beach. The
Districts Pool Regulations are similarly posted at Roberts and Castle Rock pools. Enforcement
authority for these rules is provided for in the Districts Ordinance 38 Section 401. It reads in part,
Swimming will be allowed pursuant to the rules and regulations established by the Board of
Directors as set forth in the East Bay Regional Park District Swimming Policies and Regulations,
as adopted and amended from time to time. Because the rule signs are specified in this policy,
violation of these posted rules violates Ordinance 38.

Lifeguards are responsible to advise on and enforce the Beach and Swim Regulations and
Pool Regulations. Following is a sample rule sign for most of the District lifeguarded facilities.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Visitor Rules and Regulations S-3.2

BEACH AND SWIM RULES


(Temescal, Lake Anza, Don Castro, Cull Canyon, Contra Loma, Shadow Cliffs, Quarry Lakes)

Posted rules at Del Valle and Roberts are slightly different. More information on their
content is provided later in this section.

Rule Purpose

The purpose of rules and regulations, both posted and discretionary, is to address an
associated safety concern. It is often helpful to convey not only the rule but also its purpose when
trying to gain compliance by the public.

POSTED RULES

The following list makes up posted rules and their associated safety concerns. The posted
rules are not discretionary and therefore need to be enforced at all times. Possible exceptions may

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Visitor Rules and Regulations S-3.2

include reasonable accommodations to people with disabilities. Consult your Aquatic Supervisor
when in doubt.

When lifeguards are on duty follow their instructions


Safety concerns vary depending on conditions. Not every rule can be posted. The
District recognizes the lifeguards expertise in assessing water and swim area hazards.
The District extends to lifeguards the authority and responsibility to take action
necessary to carry out their duties.

Swimming is restricted to designated area


District policy provides designated swimming areas in an effort to manage aquatic
risk and provide public service. The risk to swimming outside designated areas is
greater, so the District prohibits it.

Swimming permitted only when lifeguards are on duty


This rule relates to District lifeguards at Roberts, Don Castro, Cull Canyon, Castle
Rock and Contra Loma. Californias Health and Safety code specifies that swimming
is not allowed in facilities of artificial construction without lifeguards on duty.

No diving in shallow water


The risk for head, neck or back injury is high when entering the water head first. It is
especially high when the water is shallow. The risk of striking the bottom or unseen
submerged objects outweighs the potential fun.

No alcoholic beverages, dogs, glass containers, fishing and barbecues permitted on the beach
or in the swim area
Drinking alcohol impairs judgment and coordination, both necessary for safe
swimming. Keeping alcohol away from swimming areas may reduce the incidence of
swimming under the influence of alcohol.

Dog excretion presents a health risk in swimming areas. Dogs may also present a
biting hazard and many people are uncomfortable around unfamiliar dogs. Given
these two factors a blanket rule is established for consistency and ease of
enforcement.

Glass containers have the potential for breaking. Broken glass is very hard to clean up
in the sand, water or concrete and presents a high risk for laceration, puncture, and
embedded object injury.

Fishing presents a risk to others in casting weighted line, entanglement in fishing line
and impalement in hooks.

Hot coals used in barbecues present a burn hazard, especially to bare foot people. Hot
coals in the sand are hard to see and clean up. Barbecues can also heat up the sand

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Visitor Rules and Regulations S-3.2

around them for hours. Gas barbecues are included in this rule for consistency and
ease of enforcement.

Floatation devices in shallow water only


It is impossible for lifeguards to assess the swimming ability of someone on a float.
Floats deflate and people fall or are knocked out of them. They are not designed to be
lifesaving devices. People on floats in deep water often rely on them for that purpose.
People, especially children, have a tendency to go into deep water with floats.
Children using floats are often supervised less closely by their parents. A complete
non-swimmer who loses a float in deep water may not struggle on the surface but
submerge unseen. Floats are an attraction to others. Groups around floats are hard to
assess. Floats can block the view of lifeguards, people may be under or behind them.
For these reasons a blanket rule is established for consistency and ease of
enforcement. In practice, shallow water is defined by the wading rope but it may
mean shallower areas for small children. Coast Guard approved personal floatation
devices correctly worn and in serviceable condition are allowed in shallow water up
to chest deep. Adults standing in chest deep water may have infants or toddlers
wearing PFDs with them as long as the adult is holding the child.

A Coast Guard approved personal floatation device will have received an


Underwriters Laboratory Standard endorsement which is usually silk screened or
attached on a label on the inside of the PFD. For example it will read: UL 1177 or
UL 1123

No floatation devices weekends and holidays (Del Valle only)


The above reasons apply. In addition, experience has shown that weekends and
holidays at Del Valle are often very crowded. Due to the campground, people have a
tendency to bring large floatation devices to the beach. These exaggerate the danger
of blocking the lifeguards view and knocking people down if kept in shallow water.
Water fluctuation also makes it very difficult to maintain a consistent wading area.
Through several years of trying to address these problems (putting a limit on the
size/type etc.) the District has taken the position of prohibiting floats on weekends
and holidays for consistency and ease of enforcement. Coast Guard approved
personal floatation devices correctly worn are allowed in shallow water (up to chest
deep) on weekends and holidays.

No snorkels, masks or scuba equipment permitted


Training is necessary in order to properly use masks and snorkels. Also there is a
variety of equipment quality that is brought to the parks. An improperly used mask
and snorkel can cause water aspiration. A snorkeler laying motionless on the surface
is hard to assess by a lifeguard. The danger of shallow water blackout is increased
while using this equipment (even in experienced snorkelers) and is almost impossible
to detect by lifeguards. Scuba diving is prohibited as a District wide policy due to its
inherent risks and supervision difficulties (except within specified programs).

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Visitor Rules and Regulations S-3.2

Swim attire required No nudity


Wearing clothing not designed for swimming increases the risk of drowning due to
increased weight and drag. Nudity is prohibited by District-wide ordinance because it
may offend others. An exception is made for children under 5 years old. However, if
a complaint is received, it is generally a good idea to enforce the nudity restriction.

No pets
The associated health hazard and potential for harm to others causes the District to
adopt this blanket rule regarding pets.

Litter should be placed in containers


Littering is unsightly, discourteous and potentially unhealthful. It is listed as a
specific violation of Ordinance 38, Section 504.

Diaper Policy
Ordinance 38 states that, Incontinent individuals are prohibited from water contact
activities in non-chlorinated swimming areas. The Department of Environmental
Health has made this requirement of the District in an effort to insure water quality
remains acceptable for swimming. With insufficient water clarity at our lake facilities
it is very difficult to identify accidental fecal releases (AFR) and the lack of chlorine
negates the opportunity for chemical sanitation of the water to occur.

At chlorinated facilities, swim diapers are required. They have been shown to be
better at fecal retention than regular or disposable diapers.

POSTED RULES SPECIFIC TO ROBERTS POOL

No floatation devices
For the same reasons stated above and the pool area is too small to accommodate
their safe use.

No Running
The concrete deck and locker room areas are slippery when wet. A fall in these areas
could result in serious injury.

Shower before entering the pool


Water sanitation and clarity of pool water is required by the Health and Safety Code.
Showers prevent unnecessary contaminants from entering the pool.

DISCRETIONARY RULES

Given the myriad of potential ways visitors may get injured, the District relies on lifeguard
good judgment in taking discretionary preventive actions not specified on the rule signs.
Recognizing this need, the first rule on the signs is: When lifeguards are on duty follow their

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 5 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Visitor Rules and Regulations S-3.2

instructions.

When enforcing discretionary rules, remember that you are the person responsible for the
safety of everyone at the swimming area and that you are the expert in recognizing the potential for
injury from the Districts perspective. Information on common discretionary rules and their purpose
is provided below.

Lifeguards have the authority to enforce discretionary rules based upon conditions that apply.
For example, it may be fine for a child to throw sand while playing alone near the shore but not
alright for the same child to throw sand around others. It is important to error on the side of safety
when making decisions. Also, it is important to recognize that activities need to be appropriate for
the environment. For example, teens using loud foul language (even among themselves) may not be
appropriate for the public beach environment.

Consistency
It is important for discretionary rules to be enforced consistently. Difficulties arise
when this is not done. For example, if you allow someone to swim in deep water
without an over-arm stroke and then try to prohibit someone else from doing so, it
may become difficult to gain compliance. In these cases, it is important that
lifeguards explain clearly the criteria they are using in order to make their judgment.

Facility staffs need to consistently enforce discretionary rules day-to-day as well as


from one lifeguard to another throughout the rotation.

The following is a partial list of actions that are prohibited unless there are unusual
conditions that call for allowing it.

Swimming without an over-arm stroke in deep water


This is perhaps the Districts most commonly enforced discretionary rule; in practice
it borders on a mandatory enforcement that could be posted. It is important to be a
strong swimmer if venturing out into deep water. One of our most common causes of
deep water rescues occurs when people overestimate their swimming ability. Having
the ability to swim an over-arm stroke demonstrates to lifeguards a degree of strength
and skill. Endurance is also an important factor to consider. As necessary, strength,
endurance and skill can be tested by giving a swim test. (For more information see
reference number S-3.1 Swim tests) However, swimming with an over-arm stroke is
not a definitive demonstration of ability to swim safely in deep water. Some people
may be very strong swimmers while using breaststroke, sidestroke or some variation.
It is up to the lifeguard in the chair to make the determination if someone swimming
without an over-arm stroke is safe or needs to be called back to chest deep water.

Throwing objects: sand, rock, ball, Frisbee, etc.


Errant throws may cause injury when striking others. Sand in the eyes is a particular
concern.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 6 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Visitor Rules and Regulations S-3.2

Rough play, fighting, wrestling


Rough play has a tendency to get out of hand and cause injury. The play may also
accidentally hurt those nearby. Rough play in the water often results in accidental
water aspiration due to unexpected dunking.

Splashing directed toward others


May cause eye injury or water aspiration. Annoying to others.

Hanging on ropes and buoys


Causes damage to ropes and buoys. When sunk its not visible to others who may
need it for reference/safety, it is no longer a barrier to boats. Ropes may be used by
weak swimmers to get into deep water.

Building human pyramids, shoulder rides, throwing people, flips, cartwheels, skim
boarding, etc.
These activities usually occur in shallow water where a fall can result in injuries from
striking the bottom or others.

Inflatable boats with oars, being upside down


Errant oars strike others. People inside the air pocket of an upside down inflatable
boat are impossible to see so people may be in trouble without the lifeguard knowing
it.

Balls in deep water


They are often used as a form of floatation. Also, people often lose control of them
and then feel compelled to chase after them farther from shore. They may then find
that they have exceeded their swimming ability and need help.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/02


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 7 of 7
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Swim Break S-3.3

Swim Breaks

The following represents guidelines for conducting swim breaks.

Duration of Swim Break: 15 minutes

Number of Swim Breaks: 3 Swim Breaks each day

Time of Swim Breaks: 1:00PM, 3:00PM, and 5:00PM

Purpose:
Increase visitor safety and enjoyment by:
Giving lifeguards a break in scan intensity. (Lifeguards will continue with normal
operations and staff all chairs required.)
Creating a structured time to remind parents to take small children to the restroom.
Creating a structured time for adults to re-unite and check in with children. This
includes a recommended buddy check with school/day camp groups.
Reminding parents/guardians of the importance of supervising and watching their
children carefully.
Creating a structured time for children to rest and re-warm. The American Red Cross
has identified some common causes of rescue that include people becoming
overexerted or too cold.
Allowing adults a time to enjoy themselves without any children in the water, adults
can leisurely swim/lap-swim.
Allowing lifeguards to do a safety check of the aquatic facility (water quality check,
check for AFRs, and visual floor bottom inspection where applicable), this safety
inspection can be done by the lifeguard at the backer station.

Lifeguard Announcement:

Beginning Break
May I have your attention please, it is now time for a 15 minute safety swim break. All
children 15 years old or younger must completely exit the water for fifteen minutes. Adults 16 years
or older may continue to swim. Parents please use this time to allow your children to rest, re-warm
and use the restroom. At the end of the safety swim break we will announce when children may re-
enter the water. Thank you for your cooperation.

Ending Break
May I have your attention please, children may now re-enter the water. Parents please
supervise and watch your children carefully. Thank you and please swim safely.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/11/03


Last revised 3/30/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Swim Break S-3.3

General Guidelines:
Lifeguards will request that all children remain completely out of the water; crowd
management may be an issue on hot and busy days. Lifeguards are advised to request that children
stay back away from the shoreline.
The lifeguard in the head chair will conduct the announcement using the voice gun. The
whistle signal on the voice gun should be used. The siren signal should be used only for
emergencies.

Lifeguard Discretion:
The PIC may incorporate additional swim breaks as deemed necessary. Factors to consider
when adding an additional swim break: crowd, weather temperature, number of children in the
water, and recent incidents of AFRs.

Quarry Lakes:
Students from the California School for the Deaf frequently visit Quarry Lakes swim area,
their school is located within a couple miles of Quarry Lakes. When the lifeguards conduct regular
swim breaks they are challenged with communicating with the students who cannot hear.

A flagging system that students can recognize will help them understand when the swim
breaks are being conducted or when an emergency occurs. The flags will be waved by the lifeguards
in the chairs as swim break or emergency announcements are being made and then will be put up in
the lifeguard chair for the duration of the swim break or emergency.

The following colored flags will be used:

Red Flag Aquatic Emergency. All visitors must exit the water.

Yellow Flag Swim Break. All children 15 years old or younger must completely exit the
water.

Once the emergency or swim break is over then the flag will be taken down.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/11/03


Last revised 3/30/09
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Dog Prohibitions S-3.4

Dog Prohibitions

Specific Parks Or Areas Of Parks Where Dogs Are Prohibited


(under authority of Ordinance 38 Section 801.1)
Bathing Beaches or Swimming Pools:
Contra Loma Beach/Swim Area
Crown Beach/Swim Area
Cull Canyon Swim Lagoon/Beach
Del Valle Beaches/Swim Area
Don Castro Lagoon/Beach
Lake Anza Beach/Swim Area
Lake Temescal Beach/Swim Area
Miller Knox - Keller Beach
Roberts Pool
Castle Rock Pool
Little Hills Pool
Shadow Cliffs Beach/Swim Area
Quarry Lakes Beach/Swim Area

District Lakes where Dog Swimming is Prohibited:


Lake Chabot
Lake Del Valle - Oak Point North to East Marina
Contra Loma Lake
Shadow Cliffs- Main Lake
Quarry Lake Lakes
Temescal Lake

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/11/03


Last Revised: 3/25/05
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Child Supervision S-3.5

Child Supervision

Children 12 years old and under are not permitted in the swimming area unless accompanied by a
responsible, actively supervising, individual 16 years old or older.

Enforcement guidelines
Whenever practical, staff at swim area entrance kiosks will stop and question children who
appear to be attempting to enter without adequate supervision.
Children in the swimming area without apparent adequate supervision will be questioned and
their guardian contacted and advised of the rule, if possible the children should be removed
from the swim area and prohibited from swimming until appropriate supervision is in place.
Police may be contacted to help enforce the guideline as a last resort.
Children dropped off at the swimming area may be turned away. Staff will attempt to contact
parents as time and resources allow. Lifeguards should be contacted if, at the gate attendants
discretion, turning away the child may be unsafe.
Rule signs will be posted in both Spanish and English.
The ratio of non-professional supervisors/guardians to child should not exceed 1:5 and
professional child care providers (day camps): supervisor to child should not exceed 1:10
even if their license allows it.
Staff may set up a separate area for children that do not meet this supervision requirement
and prohibit them from swimming.
In an effort to provide guidance to lifeguards in determining whether a parent is actively
supervising their children; those that are 7 years old and younger should generally be
approximately arms reach away.
Children that are 8-12 years old should have their parent facing the water, with their children
in sight and within vocal distance. The parent should be readily identifiable to the lifeguard
while talking to the child.

Background
There has been increasing staff concern regarding children in the swimming areas without
adequate supervision. When staff approaches the public in these situations, typically one of
the first responses is where is the rule?
In California, drowning is the leading cause of injury death for persons under 15 years old
(http://www.usla.org/PublicInfo/safety_guide.asp#1)
District rescue records illustrate the majority of rescues are to those 12 years old and under.
Table shows data from years1996-2004. Approximately 2,000 rescues.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/26/08


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Child Supervision S-3.5

Rescues by Age

Count of Age
180

160

140

120

100
Total
80

60

40

20

(bl
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
50
51
52
55
56
63
69
Age

The majority of swim area missing person incidents occur to children 12 years old or
under. Dealing with these emergencies represents a drain on resources and disruption of
public service.

2006 Missing Persons


n:103

18
Adult range
16
14 stats are most
12 likely found
10 children Series1
8
6
4
2
0
k
10
11
12
13
14
23
24
25
37
38
39
46
53
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

un

Age

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/26/08


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions Child Supervision S-3.5

According to an email survey of Bay Area pool operators, 25 agencies have some type of
supervision requirement for children entering their swim facility. Specific requirements
vary widely between agencies.

Lifeguard attention is spread among all swimmers. Safety is improved for everyone when
parents/guardians are monitoring and controlling their kids (smaller groups) and their
behavior.

Day camps with professional staff are allowed a less strict supervision ratio due to their
training, group control, paid status, licensing, and sponsoring organization guidelines, etc.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/26/08


Last revised 2/26/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Preventive Actions A Frame Pub. Ed. Signs S-3.6

Public Education Portable Signs


Each facility is equipped with a portable A-Frame sign with pre-printed slide-in messages
intended to increase water safety awareness among our visitors.

Each facility also has a white board insert for the A-frame signs.

The following is a list of pre-approved formatted messages that may be written on the white
board insert. Any of these messages can be used without approval from your Aquatic Supervisor.
Aquatic Staff encourages new ideas and informative messages from lifeguard staff. New messages
MUST get approval from the respective Aquatic Supervisor BEFORE posting.

If you would like to have a message translated into Spanish, contact your Aquatic Supervisor.

The A-frame sign should be kept under supervision in order to avoid vandalism.

Caution should be exercised when carrying the signs because they have a sharp edge.

Approved messages
Drowning will ruin your day Stay within your limits
Were on duty but cant see it all Please watch your children
Get wet and stay safe!
Support your drowning defense team Get wet and stay safe
Support your local lifeguard Watch your children
Dont float where you cant swim
If youre underwater, we cant see you
Swim with a buddy
Drowning can happen suddenly
Sun is fun but too much will hurt
Distracted for a second Gone for a lifetime
Children drown without a sound
Feet first only
Please enter safely
Only toilet trained children
Parents reunite with your children during swim breaks
No running or horseplay
Defecation contamination will result in facility closure
Swim sober
Life jackets = boating safety
Dont dive head first, protect your neck
There is no substitute for adult supervision

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/25/08


Last revised 12/15/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Employee General Guidelines S-4.1

General Employee Safety Guidelines

Lifeguard safety is of paramount importance. Safety is the business of all


employees.

The Districts Safety Manual provides guidance to staff. It is the Districts


policy to provide a safe work place, safe working conditions and required safety
equipment for its employees in order to minimize injury and to assure compliance
with all applicable federal, state and local safety regulations.

Given the nature and environment in which lifeguards perform their duties it is
impossible to eliminate all hazards. However we will strive to eliminate any
unnecessary hazards and will provide all appropriate resources to do tasks in
environments where know hazards exits. To that extent, we will provide employees
training, safety equipment and procedural guidelines for performance of tasks.

All District employees have a responsibility to work safely and efficiently.


Safety will not be compromised and employees will not perform any activities that
create an unsafe situation likely to cause an injury or damage property. Employees
must use all safety equipment necessary to do specific tasks as identified by the
District and will perform the tasks in a way that avoids accidents and injuries to
themselves and/or fellow employees.

All employees are strongly encouraged to report to management/supervisors


any unsafe conditions and hazards that are identified. We will strive to create a
workplace which recognizes the value of all employees and eliminates any
unnecessary injuries.

Some general reminders for lifeguards:


Pay attention to what you are doing. Think before you act.
Follow the techniques that are provided in certification and in-service training
programs
Take care in entering and exiting lifeguard chairs
Be careful to follow good biomechanics when lifting and moving equipment

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/25/08


Last revised 2/25/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Safety Employee General Guidelines S-4.1

Place equipment carefully and secure it so that it doesnt fall or drop and hit
someone
Rescues are urgent and often require maximum physical effort without warning
maintaining a high fitness level will help avoid injury
All staff should set the tone for safety conduct safety briefings before events,
hold regular tailgate safety meetings, review safety issues during morning
briefings
Staff should stay within their level of training and ability, ensuring to use
equipment as designed. If someone is not sure about their ability to perform a
task they should talk to their supervisor about it.
Pattern diving presents a particular hazard to lifeguards. Avoid rapid deep
breathing prior to diving. Do not push your breath-hold limits. Use good ear
pressure equalization techniques to avoid injury. Be cautious if swimming
through underwater plant life. Watch out for each other.
Make sure training scenarios are realistic to job situations.
Follow safe sun practices: use sunscreen appropriately, remain in the shade as
much as possible, wear sunglasses, rash guards, etc.
Watch where you are walking and wear footwear that is appropriate for the job.
Keep body substance isolation equipment readily available and follow universal
precautions.
Use caution when pole-pounding. Ensure park staff is available to assist by
providing proper protective equipment and coaching on proper technique as
necessary
Swim with a rescue buoy when outside the swimming area.
Pay attention to each other during deep water training scenarios.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/25/08


Last revised 2/25/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Emergencies
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Universal E-1.1

E
Emergency
A
Action
P
Plan

Universal
Identify
Identify the emergency or that it is about to occur.

Prevent
Take initial actions to warn and steps that may prevent or minimize the chance of an
emergency and its impact.

Alert
Notify other resources, or individuals, that may become involved in the response to the
emergency.

Decide
Determine the best course of action to resolve the emergency.

Act
Perform the decided upon action.

Evaluate
Determine if the emergency has been resolved or if another form of action is required.

Document
Completed any necessary documentation to record the facts of the incident.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/6/03


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Chlorine Release E-1.2

Chlorine Release Procedure


Identify
Look for signs of chlorine release (e.g. heavy chlorine smell,
audible, visible alarms)
Notification from park staff

Prevent
Prevent public or staff from entering area

Alert
Notify other lifeguards to a possible chlorine release
Notify Control 1 and park staff
Establish IC as needed

Decide
Determine appropriate area of refuge for staff and public
(uphill and upwind of release)

Act
Evacuate public and staff to refuge area. Assist those with
disabilites.
Do not attempt to control leak
Direct responding emergency personnel to area as needed

Evaluate
Is everyone out of danger?
Determine if anyone needs medical attention
Call for additional resources as needed
Provide first aid as needed
Determine if facility can reopen after release is
controlled

Document
Complete Medical Incident Report on patients if transfer of
care is indicated
Notify supervisor
Make appropriate comments on Daily Log

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3-6-03


Last revised 2/20/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Crowd Management E-1.3

Crowd Management
Identify
Monitor weather
Consider time of year / week
Staff not receiving appropriate breaks
Staff feeling overwhelmed

Prevent
Communicate concerns to supervisor
Know staff availability
Determine schedules early

Alert
Notify On-duty supervisor
o Phone
o Pager
o Dispatch
o Other supervisors as necessary

Decide
Resources deployed in an efficient manner?
Reducing swim area
Restricting access to deep water
Instituting swim breaks
Limiting entrance to facility. Assist line w/ water,
shade, safety messages
Calling in off-duty staff
Redeploying staff, curtailing breaks
Police / Park staff assistance
Closing facility / clearing water

Act
Take appropriate actions

Evaluate
Determine if further action is required

Document
Make appropriate comments on Daily Log

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/6/03


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Crowd Management E-1.3

Contra Loma Swim Lagoon Capacity Procedure

Capacity inside the swim lagoon is 1500. The control point is the entrance gate to the swim lagoon
for determining capacity

Capacity will generally only occur on holiday weekends with capacity crowds throughout the park.

The Park Supervisor, or acting, and lifeguard PIC will review staffing and crowd control plans early
on holiday or hot weather days. If there is a lifeguard staffing shortage that creates the need to
reduce the lagoon capacity below 1500, a plan will be developed.

The swim gate attendant will notify the lifeguard PIC and Park Supervisor or Acting Supervisor
regarding capacity concerns as early in the day as possible. They will coordinate their staffs
response.

Park Ranger staff and Police will be requested to assist with the anticipated closure and should be
present when it occurs.

At closure, the Pool Kiosk and Entrance Kiosk will be notified to post the POOL FULL/CLOSED
sign at their entrance. Dispatch will also be notified.

THE POOL WILL BE CLOSED TO ALL BUT PUBLIC WITH WRISTBANDS

Gate attendants will remain in place until the pool is closed for the day (6PM).

Depending on the demand for swimming, the Park Supervisor, or acting, may decide whether to
remove, collect and count wrist bands of people leaving for the day. In consultation with the
lifeguard PIC, ticket sales may be re-opened, allowing new entries up to the amount of wrist bands
collected from those whove left. If it is a capacity crowd in the park, the pool will probably not
clear out enough to reopen for additional use.

If the crowd in the pool exceeds the control of lifeguard staff prior to reaching 1500, and lifeguards
have attempted other crowd control measures (see LSM E-1.3) then a decision will be made to stop
ticket sales.

The chain of command should be followed to make closure decisions/notifications.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/6/03


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 2
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Post Emerg. Management E-1.4

Post Emergency Management


Identify
Critical incident
Crowd size
Equipment needs
Staff needs

Prevent
Communicate concerns to supervisor
Know staff abilities
Maintain equipment stock (& re-stock from Fire/Amb)

Alert
Notify On-duty supervisor
o Phone
o Pager
o Dispatch
o Other supervisors as necessary

Decide
Can current resources be re-deployed effectively?
Curtail breaks, alter the rotation
Restrict access to deep water
Institute swim breaks
Limit entrance to facility
Reduce swim area
Call in off-duty staff or staff from other parks
Police / Park staff assistance
Stop LG service/close facility/clear water

Act
Take appropriate actions

Evaluate
Determine if further action is required

Document
Make appropriate comments on Daily Log
East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/31/04
Last revised 4/2/04
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Lightning E-1.5

Lightning
Identify
Monitor weather
Hear thunder
See lightning

Prevent
Clear water and beach area. Assist those w/ disabilities
Patrons should seek shelter inside building or in their
vehicle
Lifeguards should seek shelter inside building

Alert
Notify On-duty Supervisor and Dispatch
Notify park staff / front gate

Decide
No thunder or lightning in previous 20 minutes?

Act
Swimming can resume
Advise Park Staff, Supervisor and Dispatch

Evaluate
Determine if further action is required

Document
Make appropriate comments on Daily Log

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/8/04


Lifeguard Service Manual Last Revised: 2/20/08
Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans AFR/Vomit E-1.6

Accidental Fecal/Vomit Release


Prevent
Enforce diaper policy
Conduct swim breaks

Identify
Solid fecal material or stomach content vomit
Loose fecal material

Alert
Notify lifeguard staff
Notify park staff / front gate (for possible closure)
Clear pool of swimmers for decontamination
Notify Dispatch for loose AFR in chlorinated areas

Decide
Appropriate clean-up, decontamination procedure
Need to notify Aquatic Supervisor for alternate
assignments

Act
Take appropriate steps as indicated in clean-up,
decontamination procedure (following pages)

Evaluate
Determine if further action is required

Document
Make appropriate comments on Daily Log

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/8/04


Lifeguard Service Manual Last Revised: 12/11/08
Page 1 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans AFR/Vomit E-1.6

PROCEDURE FOR SOLID AFR OR STOMACH CONTENT VOMIT INCIDENT


SWIM LAGOON/POOL

Should an accidental fecal release occur involving solid fecal matter or stomach-content vomit, the following
procedure should be followed:

Lifeguards
1. Clear water of all swimmers and notify Park Supervisor/Actor of the incident via park radio.
2. At Contra Loma: Contact Park Staff to come to the site and assess the situation.
3. After donning all appropriate personal protective equipment, (eye protection, gloves), remove any
solid fecal matter or vomit as soon as possible. Use a bucket and dispose of the material in a sanitary
sewer. Disinfect the equipment used to collect the material. Do not vacuum feces from the pool.
4. Wash body areas that came in contact with pool water with soap and fresh water.
5. Be prepared to resume lifeguard service in 30 minutes.

Park Rangers/Supervisor
1. When notified of the incident, proceed to the swim complex to oversee sanitation steps.
2. (Contra Loma only) Notify Craig Smith of Contra Costa Environmental Health (925) 646-5225 x 206
3. Raise the chlorine to 2 ppm (if less than 2 ppm) and ensure the waters pH is between 7.2-7.5 and
temperature is about 77 degrees F.
4. After 30 minutes of maintaining pool circulation, chlorine at 2 ppm and pH between 7.2-7.5, for adequate
disinfection/contact time, coordinate with lifeguards re-opening of the water for swimming. If using
chlorine stabilizers disinfection time may be longer; check with state or local regulators.
5. Document the fecal accident date, time, whether the stool was formed or diarrhea and the free chlorine
and pH levels at the time of the event. Before re-opening the pool, record the free chlorine and pH levels,
the procedures followed in response to the AFR and the contact time.

PROCEDURE FOR LOOSE (DIARRHEA) AFR


SWIM LAGOON/POOL

Should an accidental fecal release occur involving loose fecal matter, the following procedure should be
followed:

Lifeguards
1. Clear water of all swimmers and notify Park Supervisor/Actor of the incident via park radio.
2. At Contra Loma: Contact Park Staff to come to the site and assess the situation.
3. After donning all appropriate personal protective equipment, (eye protection, gloves), remove any
solid fecal matter as soon as possible. Use a bucket and dispose of the material in a sanitary sewer.
Disinfect the equipment used to collect the material. Do not vacuum feces from the pool.
4. If body contact with the water was necessary during removal, wash exposed areas with soap and
water.
5. Advise patrons the pool will be closed until the following day in order to complete water sanitation
procedures. If asked, advise patrons to speak with the pool gate attendant for a possible rain-check.
6. It may be necessary for a lifeguard to remain at the facility to keep swimmers out of the water.
Contact the Aquatic Supervisor for possible re-assignment while putting away equipment.
7. Patrons may remain in the complex but may not enter the water.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/8/04


Lifeguard Service Manual Last Revised: 12/11/08
Page 2 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans AFR/Vomit E-1.6

Gate Attendant
1. When notified of the incident, stop collecting swim fees, secure the cash register and post the no
swimming signs.
2. Provide a raincheck to anyone leaving the pool gates for the day.

Park Ranger 1 (Park entrance)


1. When notified of the incident, post the no swimming sign. Advise entering patrons that the pool is closed
for the day.

Park Rangers/Supervisor
1. Notify entrance kiosk that swimming is suspended for the day due to an AFR.
2. (Contra Loma Only) Notify Craig Smith of Contra Costa Environmental Health (925) 646-5225 x
206.
3. Raise chlorine concentration to achieve 20 mg/l throughout lagoon, with the pH between 7.2-7.6.
Note time when this concentration is reached and maintain this concentration for the next 12.75
hours, with the circulation running, to achieve the contact inactivation value (CT value) of 15,300. If
using chlorine stabilizers check with state or local regulators.
4. A thorough filter backwash should be performed prior to reopening the lagoon.
5. Prior to reopening, chlorine concentration throughout the lagoon should be lowered using sodium
thiosulfate to the normal operating concentration.
6. Document the fecal accident date, time, whether the stool was formed or diarrhea and the free
chlorine and pH levels at the time of the event. Before re-opening the pool, record the free chlorine
and pH levels, the procedures followed in response to the AFR and the contact time.

PROCEDURE FOR SOLID or LOOSE (DIARRHEA) AFR or VOMIT INCIDENT


LAKE

Lifeguards
1. After donning all appropriate personal protective equipment, (eye protection, gloves), remove as
much fecal matter or vomit as soon as possible. Use a bucket and dispose of the material in a sanitary
sewer.
2. Wash body areas that contacted contaminants with soap and fresh water.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/8/04


Lifeguard Service Manual Last Revised: 12/11/08
Page 3 of 3
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emerg. Action Plan Recreational Water Illness E-1.7

Recreational Water Illness


Identify
Report of illness from public they believe is associated with
swimming
Media or public inquiry

Alert
Notify additional resources as necessary

Decide
Need to treat as medical emergency

Act
Provide appropriate medical treatment
Collect:
o Name, address, phone number
o Signs and symptoms
o Recent swimming history at facility
o For dermatitis type condition:
Complete the Dermatitis Notification Form
Advise Water Management and Park Supervisor of incident
Advise Aquatic Supervisor

Evaluate
Determine if additional resources are required at incident

Document
Complete Medical Incident Report if transfer of care is
indicated
Complete First Aid Walk-In form for minor first aid
Make note on Daily Log

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/19/04


Last revised 3/19/04
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Biohazard Clean up E-1.8

Biohazard Clean up
Identify
Biohazard present on land
Biohazard present in water (see E-1.6 AFR Solid/vomit incident)

Prevent
Keep patient in confined area
Block off area, keep bystanders back
Use adequate dressings and bandages
Keep biohazard disposal bags handy. Give waste to fire or ambulance if possible

Alert
Notify PIC of need for clean up

Decide
Adequate training and equipment for clean up?
Additional notifications necessary? Water Management?

Act
Follow universal precautions during clean up
Wipe up spill w/ absorbent material and discard in biohazard bag
Mix bleach and water solution (1:9 ratio)
Gently pour solution on contaminated area. Let stand 20 minutes.
Wipe up the remaining solution and discard in double bagged garbage bag
Disinfect non-disposable cleaning supplies as above and air dry
Thoroughly wash hands with soap and water

Evaluate
Determine if further action is required

Document
Make appropriate comments on Daily Log

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/22/06


Last revised 2/22/06
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Fire E-1.9

Fire Response
Identify
Fire threatening swim area

Alert
Notify patrons of imminent threat
Notify Control 1 of fire behavior location, size, slope, rate of spread, fuel,
threatened areas

Prevent
Evacuate public from area. Assist those with disabilities. Consider having public
take shelter where they are (shelter in place)
Secure equipment in safe area if possible

Decide
Can safely assist incoming resources?
Crowd control? Communications? Access information?

Act
Assist with managing incident if requested by IC
Notify Aquatic Supervisor

Evaluate
Determine if further action is required

Document
Make appropriate comments on Daily Log

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/20/08


Last revised 2/20/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Missing Person E-2.1

Response to a report of a missing or submerged person

General
A drowning victim is an infrequent occurrence in a guarded swim area. A report of a missing
person usually results in finding the lost person in a location free of harm. However, it is important
to ensure that a credible report of a person missing in the water is investigated assuming that the
person is submerged. Time is critical in a submersion. A submerged victim most likely will only
have a few minutes before death becomes imminent.

Without each of the following, chances for survival of a submerged victim rapidly decline:
1. A report of a missing/submerged person within seconds of submersion
2. An accurate last seen location relayed to the lifeguards
3. A quick systematic response from lifeguard staff

The report of a missing person


A report of a missing person or submerged victim should be taken seriously. A lifeguard
should quickly determine if a missing person is likely in the water, and if so, if a specific location
can be determined. If conditions allow for a clear view of the swim area bottom, quickly make a
thorough visual check of the area. Otherwise, staff should be assembled as quickly as possible in
order to perform a quick systematic water search. Lifeguards are encouraged to error on the side of
performing a water search if the reporting person gives unclear information.

Last seen location


An accurate last seen location is critical when performing an underwater search. Often this
information is unknown or unclear. If the reporting party witnessed the submersion, time should be
taken to correctly identify the location as closely as possible. The rule of thumb, for calm water, is
that the victim will be on the bottom somewhere within a circle that has a radius equal to the waters
depth, with their submersion point as the center. If practical, the first lifeguard deployed to the water
should take a marker buoy with them and use it to mark the last seen location. The lifeguard should
also take quick cross-reference bearings by lining up two sets of landmarks that allows for cross
bearing to the last seen location, this is especially true if no marker buoy is immediately available.
The marker buoy may need to be placed by incoming lifeguards but in all water searches it should be
deployed to indicate the best available last seen location.

Often the last seen location is vague or doesnt represent a very likely place for submersion.
If this occurs it is necessary for lifeguards to make a quick judgment call on where they believe the
most likely place a submerged victim may be, and then begin the search in that area. They will
consider several factors such as the victims height, swimming ability, age, swim area depths, use of
floatation, etc. As an example, someone with no swimming ability is more likely to be in an area
with the water depth of their approximate height than much shallower or deeper. A responding
lifeguard may find it useful to ask the reporting person to show them how tall the missing person is
by indicating the missing persons height on their body. The lifeguard would then use this
measurement to initiate their search at this approximate depth.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3-6-03


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Missing Person E-2.1

Lifeguard resources
A quick response from lifeguard staff is critical. A lifeguard who receives a report of a
missing or submerged victim should quickly alert other lifeguards of the situation. On duty
lifeguards should respond immediately to the notification. However, coverage of the swim area
should be maintained until the swim area can be evacuated.

Missing person procedure


The Missing Person Procedure is designed to direct a course of action. The procedure is
written in an order of priority. In fact, many of these actions are occurring simultaneously and the
IC should determine if resources are currently available to complete low priorities such as setting up
a medical station or starting a land search. The IC may choose to delay these activities until
additional resources arrive.

Witnessed submersion
Special consideration should be given to a report of a witnessed submersion. A lifeguard
receiving a report of a witnessed submersion should focus on determining the submersion location
and making a quick response. The lifeguard receiving the report should:

1. Notify lifeguard staff


2. Advise the reporting party to stay where they are because they are needed to direct
the lifeguard in the water to the exact location (using the lifeguard to provide a visual
reference).
3. Respond to the location (with the marker buoy if immediately available and deploy
it).
4. Perform a hasty search in this location, checking shore for re-direction from the
reporting party or IC each time they surface.

The next available lifeguard should contact the reporting person, confirm the location with
them and make adjustments as necessary. This lifeguard becomes the Incident Commander (IC) and
will be responsible for implementation of the Missing Person emergency action plan. The lifeguard
in the water will continue their hasty water search until other lifeguards arrive to begin an organized
search.

Search Area
Lifeguards should determine a search area once a last seen location has been determined.
The size of the search area should be small enough to be searched within minutes. Last seen point,
depths of water, bottom conditions, clarity of water are all factors that will determine the size of the
search area that can be searched in a reasonable amount of time. Lifeguards should also consider the
reliability of the reporting party. A situation in which the reporting party did not witness a
submersion would typically require a larger search area when compared to a person reporting a
witnessed submersion.

Hasty water search


A hasty water search is a one or two person search method that employs a circular or grid
pattern in the immediate vicinity of the last seen point. This method is used until additional

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3-6-03


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 2 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Missing Person E-2.1

resources arrive to conduct a pattern dive.

Pattern Dive
A pattern dive is a systematic method to completely search a water area for a submerged
person when water clarity prevents a clear view of the entire swimming area bottom. Available
lifeguards form a line and search a predetermined area. When changing directions, the lifeguards
should overlap the previously searched area with one person to ensure complete coverage of the
search area.

Lifeguards should perform a walking search line if the area being searched is shallow enough
to allow all lifeguards to stand with their chest out of the water. In order to maintain an adequate
spread between rescuers, each lifeguard should use their left hand to grab the right wrist of the
person next to them. Fins and mask (if not worn around neck) should be held in each rescuers right
hand.

Search areas that are deeper will require a diving search line using masks and swim fins
(snorkels are appropriate when the bottom can be clearly seen by lifeguards swimming on the
surface a rare condition in District swimming areas). One person should be in charge of the search
team. This person should be referred to as the search team leader and they should ensure
communication with the Incident Commander to determine the appropriate search location.

Lifeguards should dive in unison, maintaining contact with rescuers on both sides (lifeguards
should not link hands because they need their hands free to equalize pressure in their ears and protect
themselves from hitting their face on the bottom). The leader should establish a count time for
lifeguards to search the bottom. Lifeguards need to limit their breath-hold time in order to reduce
the chance of shallow water blackout. Staff should not fight the urge to breathe while underwater,
they should surface instead. Upon surfacing, all lifeguards should be accounted for. This should be
done by lifeguards monitoring the lifeguard on either side of them in the search. If a lifeguard is
missing begin an immediate search for the missing lifeguard. For more information see Reference #
E-2.5 Missing Lifeguard.. Lifeguards should not hyperventilate before diving and should only dive
to depths where they are comfortable.

If a lifeguard begins a hasty search without equipment as part of the incidents initial
deployment, responding lifeguard staff should bring out mask and fins for that lifeguard as soon as
practical.

Use of Scuba Equipment


The United States Lifesaving Association (USLA) has published in Open Water Lifesaving
The United States Lifesaving Association Manual (2003), that there is a two-minute window of
enhanced opportunity for a successful recovery and resuscitation of submerged victims. Given this
fact, and the need for specialized training and equipment to make scuba dives safely, lifeguard
personnel do not use scuba in the course of their employment without authorization. During rescue
mode operations, lifeguards conducting hasty search and pattern dives with mask and fins will
generally be the best use of lifeguard resources. However, with proper training and equipment, using
scuba to conduct an underwater search in recovery mode can be effective. Therefore, authorized dive
team personnel may use scuba equipment to search underwater areas in recovery mode. Designated

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3-6-03


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 3 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Missing Person E-2.1

dive team personnel are notified through standing dispatch protocols of submersion incidents and
will respond as appropriate.

Found Child (Missing Parents/Responsible Adult)


In most cases, a child who cannot find his or her parents/responsible adult is not an
emergency. Lifeguards who receive a found child should assume responsibility for the child if no
other park staff is available. Lifeguards should attempt to locate the missing parents/responsible
adult if resources are available. Simply obtaining some information from the child and searching the
last known location can resolve most situations. It is often helpful to walk along the shoreline or
adjacent picnic areas with the child in an attempt to attract the guardians attention. The police
should be notified if the lifeguards are unable to locate the parents/responsible adult within 10
minutes. Lifeguards should assist the police as requested if resources are available.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3-6-03


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 4 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Missing Person E-2.1

Missing Person Procedure

Report of missing person


Notify backer / LG staff
Obtain initial information
1. Last seen point?
* If water search is appropriate, mark the last seen point with a marker buoy as soon as practical.
2. When last seen?
3. Age?
4. Swimming ability?
Insure connection is made and maintained between staff and reporting person (RP) until positive ID is made
Deploy chair as needed
Insure Missing Person/Parent Procedure form is initiated

Possibility of Submersion?
High Low

Water and Land Search Land Search


Set marker buoy and confirm location with RP Complete Missing Person/Parent Procedure form
Begin hasty water search with available lifeguard(s) at last seen 1. Detailed description
point or best estimation 2. Medical conditions, etc.
Clear water Initiate search with LG staff / park staff
Drop chairs when zone cleared
Notify Control 1
1. Establish IC
2. Request resources Person located within 5 minutes?
3. Brief description (Age, gender, last seen point, when last seen,
swimming ability) Yes No
Determine search locations using situation information
1. Set boundaries
2. Cross reference/bearing
Establish pattern dive Expand Search
Complete Missing Person/Parent Procedure form Notify Control 1
1. Detailed description 1. Establish IC
2. Medical conditions, etc. Request resources
Update Control 1 and park staff with additional information 2. Detailed description
Set up medical station Organize search teams
1. Medical Response Pack/AED Make facility announcements
Land search
1. Organize search teams
2. Make facility announcements Person located within 30 minutes?

Provide medical care


Person located after initial search? Confirm positive ID with RPYes Yes
Notify Control 1/ All units No
Yes Transfer care
No Helicopter / LZ?
Complete
Need for medical
MIR attention?
Notify Supervisor
Transfer IC to PD
Yes No Notify supervisor

Consider 2nd search Confirm positive ID with RP


Notify supervisor Notify Control 1 / all units
Consider SCUBA Return equipment
Consider terminating search Staff chairs
Consider transfer IC to PD Resume service
Complete documentation Complete documentation

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3-6-03


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 5 of 5
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Missing Person Found Child E-2.2

Found Child

Report of found child


Notify Backer
Take custody of child
Initiate Missing Person/Parent Procedure
Form

Attempt to locate parents / guardian


Check last known location
Walk around with child

Parent / Guardian located within 10 minutes?


Yes No

Contact dispatch
Request police assistance
Request park staff assistance
Make announcement to public

Parent / Guardian located within 1 hour?


Yes No

Confirm Identity
Complete documentation Transfer IC to Police Department
Notify Supervisor

* IC may be transferred to Police at any time if lifeguard resources are required elsewhere

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3-6-03


Last revised 3/6/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Open Water Swims E-2.3

Missing Person - Open Water Swim


Identify
Credible report from shore
Witness submersion
Best available last seen point

Prevent
Adequate staffing and equipment on hand
Lifeguard and competitor briefing
Lifeguard deployment appropriate

Alert
Stop further heats from beginning
Lifeguard and Park staff
Activate EMS, Establish IC
Notify event organizer

Decide
Pattern dive appropriate? Scuba team needed?

Act
Keep adequate resources guarding remaining
swimmers
Mark last seen point with buoy
Deploy pre-determined lifeguard staff to search
Determine search boundaries
Collect missing person information

Evaluate
Determine if further action is required

Document
Make appropriate comments on Daily Log

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/11/05


Last revised 3/11/05
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies EAP Terminating U/W Search E-2.4

Terminating an Underwater Search


This guideline is intended as a reference for determining when to terminate an underwater search. As
mentioned in LSM E-2.1, reports of a missing person must be taken seriously. However, almost
every season there is an underwater search initiated when no one is actually missing. Staff, or a
member of the public, reports seeing what they presume to be someone submerge and the EAP is
appropriately activated. Because an underwater search commits a lot of public safety resources, puts
rescuers at increased risk, and infringes on public use of a facility, it is important to search
effectively.

One of the following three conditions should be met in order to terminate a search:
1. The person is found
2. The risk/cost outweighs the benefit
3. The incident is determined to be unfounded

General Reminders
The Incident Commander (IC) has the authority to make overall search decisions. This role is
usually filled by lifeguards initially and then by police and/or fire as the incident progresses.
Activating the EAP for a drowning search will dispatch police, fire and ambulance. Aquatic
administrative staff and Eagle will be notified and will respond as available.
Dont call off a search within the first hour unless highly confident no one is submerged
A continuous risk/benefit determination should be made. The risks being taken should not
outweigh the hoped for benefits. After 1 hour of submersion the victim is typically presumed
dead (on scene medical personnel will make this determination). The clock starts once the
water is cleared of swimmers.
Consultation with an Aquatics administrative staff member is highly recommended prior to
deciding to end the search (Dispatch can page).
The Sheriffs dive team should be requested for confirmed submersions when search
conditions are beyond the ability of District resources (usually outside of swimming areas).

Factors to consider in determining whether to call off a search include:


The incident is unfounded (see below)
Bottom conditions: weeds, depths, drop off, visibility, currents, etc.
Public relations: presence of family, time of day, crowd, etc.
Submersion time, rescuer fatigue/risks
Weather, water temperature, waves
Search effectiveness

Factors to consider in determining whether the incident is unfounded include:


Physical evidence: clothing on shore, overturned vessel without occupants, etc.
Number of witnesses, RP credibility and confidence
Likelihood of victim being in the water
Bottom search effectiveness (ask lifeguards), repetitions, etc.
Quality of last seen point, size of search area

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 12/9/05


Last Revised: 12/9/05
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Missing Lifeguard E-2.5

Missing Lifeguard on Pattern Dive


Prevent
Monitor adjacent lifeguard in pattern dive
Stay within comfortable diving depth and duration
Do not hyperventilate or fight urge to breathe
Avoid diving through excessively weedy areas (if
possible search above heavy weeds)

Identify
Missing lifeguard upon surfacing

Alert
Notify team leader who notifies shore IC
IC notify Dispatch and other staff (EMS
should be in route due to initial search)

Decide
Area just covered by pattern
Re-assign objective to find missing lifeguard

Act
Reverse direction of search line
Take cross bearing
Close gap in search line
Center line on missing lifeguard spot in line.
Re-search previous dive areas

Evaluate
Determine need to expand search area

Document
Document appropriate medical care

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 12/11/08


Last revised 12/11/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Emergency Action Plans Underwater Plant Life E-2.6

Underwater Plant Life


Identify
Monitor weed location
Monitor growth rate
Map/diagram as necessary

Prevent
Communicate concerns to supervisor
Discuss removal options
If within 4 feet of surface close off area

Alert
Notify On-duty supervisor
o Phone
o Pager
o Dispatch
o Other supervisors as necessary

Decide
Removal options
Closure methods
Public notification, signage, lifeguard deployment
changes

Act
Take appropriate actions

Evaluate
Determine if further action is required

Document
Make appropriate comments on Daily Log

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 2/25/08


Last revised 2/25/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Rescues Rescue Procedure E-3.1

Rescue Procedure

Identify
Look for characteristics of a distressed swimmer, drowning presentation
Pay extra attention to at risk groups (e.g. Small children, etc.)
If in doubt, go for rescue

Prevent
Take action prior to the need to make a rescue

Alert
Notify other lifeguards to a possible distressed swimmer
Notify backer for back-up coverage if rescue is necessary
Lifeguards covering nearby zones will expand coverage to include any uncovered area created by rescue

Decide
Determine appropriate equipment for rescue
Consider: Distance
Ability to maneuver through crowd
Size of victim
Number of victims
Depth
Personal safety

Act
Perform appropriate rescue

Evaluate
Was rescue successful?
Assess victim:
o ABCs
o Attempt to rule out water aspiration
Call for additional resources as needed
Provide first aid as needed

Document
Complete Rescue Report
Complete Medical Incident Report if transfer of care is indicated
Notify responsible adult if victim is a minor

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3-11-03


Last revised 3/11/03
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Rescues Victim Evaluation E-3.2

Victim Evaluation

If doubt exists about the victims health, EMS should be activated immediately.

Assess
Victim

Aspirated Water
Or
Yes or unknown
Altered LOC
no
Or
Contributing
Medical Condition Re-warm victim
Observe 10-15 minutes
Adult Contact guardian if minor
no yes
Victim

Contact guardian
Advise of incident
Release w/ Advice Complete Rescue Report
Release w/Advice No cough
Complete Rescue No shivering
Report no Normal vital signs yes
Alert x4

Activate EMS

Complete Rescue Report


Release w/Advice

Release Advice:
It is possible to experience delayed lung complications in the next 24 hours. Signs and symptoms may include: a
cough, breathlessness, fever, or any other worrying symptom. Special attention should be paid to children. If your (or
your childs) condition changes, go to a hospital emergency department in your area, or call your private doctor. In
the event of an emergency call 9-1-1.

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/19/04


Last revised 2/2//08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Medical Response Inside of Facility E-4.1

Medical Response Inside of Facility

Identify
Report of a medical emergency

Alert
Notify other lifeguards to a medical emergency
Notify Control 1 / park staff

Decide
Determine # of lifeguard(s) are available to respond
(Coverage of swim area is priority)
Determine if swim area must be cleared. Assist those with
disabilities as necessary
Determine what type of personal protective equipment is
required

Act
Send lifeguard(s) if appropriate
Perform appropriate medical care

Evaluate
Determine if additional resources are required at incident

Document
Complete Medical Incident Report if transfer of care is
indicated
Complete First Aid Walk-In form for minor first aid

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/03


Last revised 2/20/08
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies Medical Response Outside of Facility E-4.2

Medical Response Outside of Facility

Identify
Report of a medical emergency

Alert
Notify other lifeguards to a medical emergency
Notify Control 1 / park staff

Decide
Determine if lifeguard(s) are available to respond
(Coverage of swim area is priority)
Determine if location of victim is close enough for lifeguard
response
Determine if lifeguard(s) have appropriate safety equipment to
respond
(E.g. shoes)

Act
Send lifeguard(s) if appropriate
Perform appropriate medical care

Evaluate
Determine if additional resources are required at incident
Determine if additional resources are required at facility

Document
Complete Medical Incident Report if transfer of care is
indicated
Complete First Aid Walk-In form for minor first aid

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 4/1/03


Last revised 3/19/04
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1
Section Category Topic Reference #
Emergencies EAP AED Use E-4.3

AED Use

Identify/Alert
Notify other lifeguards of situation
Notify EMS
Conduct initial assessment

Decide
Determine witnessed vs un-witnessed arrest
o Witnessed perform CPR until AED ready to analyze
o Un-witnessed (and submersion incidents) perform CPR for two minutes prior to defibrillation
Decide appropriate equipment for use
o Adult vs pediatric pads

Act
Complete rescue as necessary, patient to dry sand, positioned parallel to shore
Turn on AED (follow prompts)
Prepare victims chest for good skin-to-pad adhesion
Place pads appropriately
o upper right and lower left chest
o avoid implanted devices
Ensure no one is touching patient as AED analyzes patient say Everyone stand clear
If shock is advised, ensure everyone is clear of patient and push the shock button when prompted
After shock or if no shock indicated perform 5 cycles of CPR using oxygen as available before reanalyzing
the heart rhythm
Repeat previous 3 steps as appropriate
Continue until transfer of patient care

Document
Complete Medical Incident Report
Make appropriate comments on Daily Log
Report use of AED to Aquatic Supervisor for specific quality assurance steps and reporting

East Bay Regional Park District Effective Date: 3/14/06


Last revised 3/26/07
Lifeguard Service Manual Page 1 of 1

You might also like